JP4772444B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of the identification information. After a predetermined variable display execution condition is satisfied, the variable display start condition is satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that starts variable display of identification information and shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, there is provided a variable display unit capable of changing the display state, and configured to give a predetermined game value to the player when the display result of the variable display unit is in a predetermined specific display mode. is there.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In the gaming machine, when a predetermined transition condition is established, the gaming state is shifted to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a display result of a variable display unit that displays a special symbol becomes a combination of a predetermined specific display mode (a big hit symbol), which is usually referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win.

  Game progress in the gaming machine is controlled by game control means such as a microcomputer. In addition, the game control means includes means for generating a pseudo-random number, and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied based on the value of the random number (for example, whether or not the display result of variable display is a combination of specific display modes) Or). For example, the game control means determines whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied by determining whether or not a random number value matches a predetermined determination value. When it is determined that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game control means shifts the gaming state to the specific gaming state.

  There is a gaming machine in which the mounting area for mounting the random number generation means and the game control means on a board is reduced by using a microcomputer equipped with a random number circuit as the game control means (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, by using a random number generated by a random number circuit mounted on the microcomputer, it is not necessary for the microcomputer CPU to perform random number update processing, and the microcomputer control burden is reduced. Has been reduced. Further, in Patent Document 1, the random number circuit is initialized from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt is set, and the game control process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is described that it comprises.

  In general, a gaming machine is configured to be able to lend a ball by inserting a prepaid card into a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-103166 (paragraphs 0039, 0041, 0095-0100, FIGS. 3-4 and 20-21)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the initial setting of the random number circuit from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt setting is performed. Set the cycle for updating the random number. However, the initial value of the generated random number cannot be set in advance. Therefore, when using a plurality of gaming machines, each gaming machine starts generating random numbers from a common initial value. Then, when using a plurality of gaming machines described in Patent Document 1, when the power of each gaming machine is turned on at the same time, each gaming machine starts generating random numbers at the same timing from the same initial value. There is a risk of the timing being recognized by a player or a game store. Therefore, there is a possibility that conditions for shifting to a specific gaming state such as a jackpot may be illegally established by generating a capture signal using a wireless signal or the like at a predetermined cycle.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is not disclosed that a gaming clerk or the like can recognize a communication error between the card unit and the gaming machine. For this reason, there is a risk of lending a ball even though the card unit and the gaming machine cannot communicate normally. Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is disclosed that a microcomputer used as a game control means prevents malfunction due to a communication error when communicating with each control board mounted on the gaming machine. Absent.

  Therefore, the present invention is to determine a display result of variable display of identification information in a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result. When generating random numbers to be used, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved, so that it is possible to prevent the condition for transition to the specific gaming state from being illegally generated and to prevent malfunction due to a communication error The purpose is to.

The gaming machine according to the present invention allows a player to perform a predetermined game by firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, each of which can be identified) Variable display means (for example, special symbol display 8) capable of variably displaying special symbols is provided, and predetermined variable display execution conditions (for example, winning a game ball to the start winning opening 14) are established. Thereafter, the variable information display starts based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (for example, the final stop of the special symbol and the end of the big hit game), and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result (for example, , It is necessary to lend from a lending request accepting device (for example, card unit 50) which has shifted to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when it becomes a jackpot symbol) and has accepted a lending request from the player. A gaming machine that pays out rented game media to be lent to a player based on a signal, and a launching means (for example, a launch motor 94) for launching the game media toward the game area, and a game for executing a game control process A microcomputer (eg, payout control) incorporating a control CPU (eg, CPU 56), a random number circuit (eg, random number circuit 503) for generating random numbers, and a CPU (eg, payout control CPU 371) other than the game control CPU. Microcomputer 370) and a game control microcomputer (for example, game control microcomputer 560) incorporating a serial communication circuit (eg, serial communication circuit 505) for serial communication, and a payout for paying out rental game media Means (for example, a ball dispensing device 97) and a lending request receiving device are connected to the gaming machine A lending request accepting device connection determination signal (for example, a VL signal) for determining whether or not it has been issued is input, and a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control micro) that executes a payout control process for controlling the payout means Computer 370), a photocoupler (for example, photocoupler 161) that transmits a lending request receiving device connection determination signal from the lending request receiving device, and a capacitor (for example, a capacitor) connected between the lending request receiving device and the photocoupler. 163, 164) mounted on the payout control board (for example, payout control board 37), and a relay board (for example, interface board 66) that relays the loan request signal from the loan request accepting device and outputs it to the payout control board. And when the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal is not transmitted from the photocoupler, the launching means is driven. And a firing stop means (for example, an AND circuit 91 that inputs an output signal from the photocoupler 161 and a firing control signal to the input side and outputs a control signal for the firing motor 94 from the output side), and a random number circuit. In accordance with a predetermined order from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value within a predetermined range in which numerical data (for example, a count value) can be updated based on an input of a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) A serial communication circuit including numerical value updating means (for example, a counter 521) for updating numerical data and random number storage means (for example, a random value storage circuit 531) for storing numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means as a random value. The multiple interrupt request conditions (for example, that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 or that transmission of transmission data has been completed) When any one of the received data is received from the control board), an interrupt request means for generating an interrupt request according to the established interrupt request condition to the game control CPU (for example, The game control microcomputer including the interrupt control circuit 714) incorporates a plurality of random number circuits having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means as random number circuits, and starts supplying power to the gaming machine. Timer interrupt setting means (for example, a part for executing step S16 in the game control microcomputer 560) for setting to generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time, and power supply to the gaming machine Random number circuit initial setting means (for example, for initial setting of the random number circuit before the timer interrupt setting is set by the timer interrupt setting means, for example, The game control CPU 560 executes an interrupt process based on an interrupt request from the interrupt request means (for example, a part for executing step S15 in the technique control microcomputer 560). Steps S41, S42, and S43 executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and variable display execution conditions when a timer interrupt occurs (for example, winning a game ball to the start winning opening 14) It is determined that the execution condition for variable display is satisfied by the execution condition determination means (for example, the part that executes steps S311 and S312 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer) and the execution condition determination means. The random number reading means for reading the random number value stored in the random number storage means (for example, a game control manager). The part of step 56 in the CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 that executes step S324) and whether the random number read by the random number reading means matches a predetermined determination value, thereby displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information Display result determining means (for example, a part for executing step S386 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to be a specific display result. Lending request accepting apparatus connection determination signal (for example, the portion of the payout control microcomputer 370 that executes step S825) and lending request accepting apparatus connection determination. When it is determined that the signal is not transmitted, Connection error notification processing means (for example, payout control micro) for executing a connection error notification process (for example, a process for notifying a prepaid card unit non-connection error) for notifying that the request receiving device is not connected to the gaming machine. A portion of the computer 370 that executes a process of displaying “7” on the error display LED 374 in the display control process of step S759 based on the setting of the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit in step S826), In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means sets a random number circuit that can be used from among a plurality of random number circuits built in the game control microcomputer, and sets a predetermined initial value of numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means, Game control microcomputer assigned to each game control microcomputer Microcomputer identification information for identifying the computer (e.g., a game control microcomputer 560 unique ID number) is set based on (e.g., portions for performing the steps S154 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), the micro gaming control The computer further includes random number stopping means for stopping the functions of the random number circuits other than the random number circuit set to be usable by the random number circuit initial setting means, and the interrupt request generated by the interrupt request means is communicated in the serial communication circuit. Including an error time interrupt request (for example, a communication error time interrupt request) that occurs when an interrupt request condition is satisfied when an error occurs, the interrupt processing execution means can execute multiple interrupt requests by the interrupt request means. When the requests are generated at the same time, the interrupt processing based on the error time interrupt request is executed. Priority processing means (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) executes step S15b in preference to interrupt processing based on other interrupt requests (for example, reception interrupt requests and transmission interrupt requests). In the interrupt process based on the error time interrupt request, including the part that executes the communication error interrupt process of FIG. 64 (a) with priority based on the execution and error time interrupt priority execution flag set The communication prohibition means for prohibiting serial communication (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets the communication error flag in steps S1241, S1251, S1261, S1271, and S1291 based on the communication error flag set in step S41). If it is determined that it has been set, the process is terminated. That.

  The gaming machine includes interrupt permission means (for example, a part for executing step S19 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) that permits execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means, and the interrupt request means is generated. The interrupt request to be generated is received when the interrupt request condition is satisfied when the serial communication circuit receives a signal from a microcomputer (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370) including a CPU other than the game control CPU. The game control microcomputer includes a time interrupt request (for example, a reception interrupt request), and the gaming control microcomputer prioritizes the interrupt processing executed by the priority processing means before the interrupt permission means is permitted to execute the interrupt processing. Priority changing means for changing the order (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S15b) The priority processing means uses the priority change means to set the priority of the interrupt processing based on the error time interrupt request. The interrupt processing based on the interrupt request based on the error is prioritized to the interrupt processing based on the error interrupt request (for example, Based on the fact that the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S15b and sets the reception interrupt priority execution flag, the reception interrupt processing in FIG. 64 (b) is preferentially executed). It may be configured.

  The game control microcomputer executes the timer interrupt process executed by the timer interrupt process executing means and the interrupt process executing means when the timer interrupt and the interrupt request by the interrupt request means occur simultaneously. Interrupt priority setting means for setting the priority with the interrupt processing before the timer interrupt is set by the timer interrupt setting means (for example, a part for executing step S15c by the game control microcomputer 560) The interrupt process executing means executes the interrupt process executed by the interrupt process executing means with priority over the timer interrupt process executed by the timer interrupt process executing means by the interrupt priority setting means. If a timer interrupt and an interrupt request by the interrupt request means are generated at the same time, the timer interrupt process execution means executes the timer interrupt process. The interrupt processing based on the interrupt request by the interrupt request means is executed earlier (for example, based on the fact that the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error). The communication error interrupt process shown in FIG. 63A is executed with priority).

  In the gaming machine, the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal transmitted from the photocoupler is branched on the payout control board (see, for example, FIG. 7), and transmits a payout control microcomputer and a fire signal for driving the launching means. You may be comprised so that it may input into a launch board (for example, launch board 90).

  The gaming machine detects that a game medium has won a predetermined winning area (for example, winning a game ball to the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) and outputs a winning detection signal (for example, a detection signal of the count switch 23) A microcomputer including a winning detection means (for example, a count switch 23) and having a CPU other than the game control CPU includes a payout control microcomputer (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370). In response to the input of the winning detection signal, the computer transmits payout number data indicating the number of prize game media to be paid out (for example, a prize ball number command) to the payout control microcomputer via the serial communication circuit. Means (for example, step in CPU 56 of game control microcomputer 560 1255 is executed to set the prize ball number command in the transmission data register 710, and the serial communication circuit 505 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 710 to the payout control microcomputer 370). The microcomputer drives the payout means to pay out the unpaid premium game media that have not been paid out among the payout numbers of the prize game media that can be specified by the payout number data transmitted by the payout number data transmission means. A prize game medium payout control means for executing payout control (for example, a portion for executing steps S631 to S635 and S627 in the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370) and a loan request signal from the loan request receiving device. Dispensing to rent out gaming media by driving out the disbursement means A lending request acceptance device connection determination signal is transmitted by the lending game medium payout control means (for example, the portion executing steps S623 to S627 in the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370) and the transmission state determination means. When it is determined that the rental game medium payout control means does not execute the rental game medium payout control, the rental game medium payout prohibition means (for example, in the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370, And the prize game medium payout controlling means pays out the rented game medium by the rented game medium payout prohibiting means when the determination at step S623a is N. Even when control execution is prohibited, prize game media The body payout control is executed (for example, even when the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 determines N in step S623a, when it is determined as N in step S631, steps S632 to S635). It is also possible to configure such that

  In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means sets a numerical maximum value register (for example, the random number maximum value setting register 535) in which a value as a maximum value in a predetermined range in which numerical data is updated is set by the numerical value updating means. Maximum value setting means for setting a predetermined maximum value (for example, a random number maximum value) within the range of numerical data that can be updated (for example, a part for executing step S152 in the game control microcomputer 560), and numerical value update means Setting value determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined maximum value set by the maximum value setting means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (for example, “256” when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set) For example, the part for executing step S153b in the game control microcomputer 560) and the set value determination means When it is determined that the predetermined maximum value set in the value maximum value register is equal to or less than the predetermined lower limit value, a predetermined value within the range of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means is stored in the numerical maximum value register (for example, , And a maximum value resetting unit (for example, a part for executing step S153c in the game control microcomputer 560). Also good.

  The gaming machine includes clock signal generation means (for example, a clock circuit 501) that generates a clock signal having a predetermined period and outputs the clock signal to a random number circuit, and the numerical value updating means is configured to input a numerical value on condition that the clock signal is input a predetermined number of times. The data is updated (for example, when the clock signal output circuit 524 inputs the random number generation clock signal SI obtained by dividing the reference clock signal CLK by 16), the counter 521 updates the count value C). In the initial setting, the number updating means may be configured to set the number of input clock signals that is a condition for updating the numerical data (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S156).

  The game control microcomputer executes a process of step S154b in the numerical value calculation means for calculating a predetermined initial value of the numerical data set by the random number circuit initial setting means by using the microcomputer identification information (for example, in the game microcomputer) The game control microcomputer 560 calculates an ID number and a predetermined value (for example, a part for obtaining a calculated value by adding a predetermined value to the ID number), and the random number circuit initial setting means includes: An initial value is set based on the value calculated by the calculation by the numerical calculation means (for example, when the gaming microcomputer executes the process of step S154b, the calculated calculated value is set as the initial value of the count value). It may be configured as follows.

  The gaming machine has a start signal output means (for example, a winning detection signal SS) that outputs a start signal (for example, a winning detection signal SS) based on the winning of a game medium in a predetermined area (for example, winning of a game ball to the start winning port 14). The random number circuit has a latch signal for causing the random number storage means to store numerical data to be updated by the numerical value update means based on the input of the start signal from the start signal output means. Latch signal output means (for example, latch signal generation circuit 533) for outputting, and the latch signal output means is provided on condition that the start signal is continuously input from the start signal output means for a predetermined period (for example, the timer circuit 534 When a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) is measured, a random number read signal output from the random number read signal output circuit 526 is input). (For example, the latch signal generation circuit 533 synchronizes the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526 with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532 to The portion may be configured to output to the random value storage circuit 531 as SL).

  The execution condition determination means determines that the variable display execution condition is satisfied on the condition that the start signal from the start signal output means is input over a predetermined number of times of timer interruption processing (for example, When the game control microcomputer 560 determines Yes in step S311, the process proceeds to step S312. In step S322, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process indicated by the interrupt counter is a predetermined number (for example, 3). The predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) may be configured to be shorter than the period (for example, 6 ms) in which a predetermined number of timer interruption processes are executed. .

  The random number circuit initial setting means sets whether or not to change the predetermined initial value set by the random number circuit initial setting means when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means in the initial setting. The random number circuit includes initial value change setting means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S157), and the random number circuit updates the numerical data to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means. A notification signal output means (for example, a counter 521) for outputting a notification signal indicating that the final value has been updated, and a setting for changing the initial value by the initial value change setting means based on the output of the notification signal The initial value changing means for changing the value of the predetermined initial value (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) It may be configured to include a portion) to perform the kick steps S220～S226.

  In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means sets the order of values from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means (for example, a permutation of count values C updated by the counter 521). Numerical value order setting means for setting whether or not to change (for example, a part for executing step S158 in the game control microcomputer 560), the random number circuit updates the numerical data up to a predetermined final value by the numerical value update means. A notification signal output means (for example, a counter 521) for outputting a notification signal indicating that the numerical data has been updated to a predetermined final value, and a numerical value order setting means based on the output of the notification signal. The numerical value updating means is updated on the condition that the arrangement order of the numerical data from the predetermined initial value to the predetermined final value is changed. Numerical value order changing means (for example, a part for executing step S24 in the game control microcomputer 560) that changes the arrangement order of the numerical data to be processed from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value. Also good.

In the first aspect of the invention, the gaming control microcomputer performs initial setting of the random number circuit from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt setting is performed, and the microcomputer identification information is set in the initial setting. Since the base value is set as the initial value of the random number, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be improved. Moreover, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and the execution condition of variable display is established illegally using radio signals. It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state from being illegally established. In addition, since it is configured to notify that the lending request acceptance device is not connected to the gaming machine when the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal is not transmitted, the lending request accepting device and the gaming machine Occurrence of a communication error can be recognized from outside by a game clerk or the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that communication between the loan request accepting apparatus and the gaming machine will be continued in a state where a communication error has occurred, and erroneous information will continue to be communicated between the loan request accepting apparatus and the gaming machine. Can be prevented. In addition, since the photocoupler for transmitting the lending request accepting device connection determination signal from the lending request accepting device and the capacitor connected to the photocoupler are mounted on the payout control board, the lending request accepting device, the payout control board, It is no longer necessary to mount a capacitor connected to the photocoupler that transmits the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal on the relay board that relays the signal between them, so it is easy to discover that an unauthorized circuit has been installed on the relay board Can be prevented, and cheating can be prevented. Furthermore, when the serial communication circuit makes an interrupt request, it is configured to preferentially execute the interrupt process when the communication error is an interrupt request condition, and control the communication to the prohibited state. It is possible to prevent communication with a control board mounted on a gaming machine in a state where a communication error has occurred. Therefore, malfunction due to a communication error can be prevented. Also, by setting only the random number circuit to be used, the range of the random number value to be generated can be set appropriately.

  In the invention described in claim 2, since it is configured to reliably set the priority of interrupt processing before the interrupt request is permitted, interrupts corresponding to a plurality of types of interrupt request conditions are set. Of the interrupt processing, the interrupt processing to be executed with priority can be surely executed. In addition, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initially set, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the game control microcomputer can be improved.

  In the invention described in claim 3, before the timer interrupt is permitted, it is ensured which of the timer interrupt processing and the interrupt processing corresponding to the interrupt request by the serial communication circuit is to be executed with priority. Therefore, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit are generated at the same time, it is possible to reliably execute an interrupt process to be preferentially executed. In addition, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initially set, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the game control microcomputer can be improved.

  In the invention described in claim 4, the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal transmitted from the photocoupler is branched on the payout control board, and the payout control microcomputer, the launch board for transmitting the fire signal for driving the launching means, Therefore, even when a malfunction occurs in the payout control microcomputer, the driving of the launching means can be stopped according to the state of transmission of the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal by the photocoupler. It becomes like this.

  In the invention according to claim 5, since it is configured to prohibit the payout of the rental game medium when the loan request reception device connection determination signal is not transmitted, between the loan request reception device and the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent lending a ball when communication cannot be performed normally. In addition, since the payout of the rental game media is prohibited, the payout of the premium game media is performed even though the communication state between the payout control microcomputer and the game control microcomputer is normal. Can be prevented from stopping. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the payout control by the payout control microcomputer from being stopped more than necessary.

In the invention described in claim 6, since the value as the maximum value of the predetermined range in which the numerical data is updated is set in advance, a value larger than the range of random numbers used during the execution of the timer interrupt process Can be prevented from being generated, and the processing load on the random number circuit and the game control microcomputer can be reduced. In addition, when the set maximum value is less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value, the predetermined maximum value is reset, so that malfunction of the game control microcomputer or radio signal is used. It is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number due to an action such as generating a captured signal to the gaming machine.

According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, since the numerical value updating means is configured to preset the number of clock signal inputs, which is a condition for updating numerical data, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. be able to.

In the invention described in claim 8, since the initial value is set based on the value calculated by the calculation using the microcomputer identification information, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. Can do. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the initial value of the random number simply by looking at the microcomputer identification information, and the security can be improved.

According to the ninth aspect of the present invention, when the random number storage means stores the random number based on the output of the latch signal, the latch signal is set on condition that the winning detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period. Since it is configured to output, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise from being erroneously recognized as the input of the input detection signal, outputting the latch signal, and storing the generated random number. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a random number generated by an illegal latch signal is stored due to an output of a latch signal by an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine. .

In the invention according to claim 10, when the random number is read from the random number storage means, the random number is read from the random number storage means on condition that the winning detection signal is continuously input while the timer interruption process is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random number storage unit is updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number storage unit from being read again.

In the invention described in claim 11 , since the predetermined initial value is updated when the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. Can do.

In the invention described in claim 12, since the arrangement order from the predetermined initial value to the predetermined final value is updated when the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value, the random number circuit generates it. The randomness of random numbers can be further improved.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding game boards described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (decorative symbol display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each variably displaying an effect decorative symbol. The variable display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, four special symbol hold memory indicators 18 for displaying the number of valid winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory), are provided. ing. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol hold storage display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. Then, each time the special symbol display 8 starts variable display, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18 reduces the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. In this example, the upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of starting memories by winning to the start winning opening 14, but the upper limit number may be four or more.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. In addition, the variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8.

  Further, on the left side of the variable display device 9, a hammer 151 is provided as a movable member used for game effects. The hammer 151 can fall to the right with the movable portion 152 as a fulcrum, and can produce an effect of hitting the leftmost decorative symbol among the decorative symbols displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an operation switch 81 that can be operated by the player while the game is in progress. For example, when the operation switch 81 is operated (pressed), the hammer 151 as a movable member operates.

  Below the variable display device 9 is provided a variable winning ball device 15 that forms a start winning opening 14. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is controlled to be opened by a solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit state) is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is a means for opening and closing the big winning opening. The winning ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 20 and led to the back of the game board 6 is detected by the count switch 23. On the back of the game board 6, a solenoid 21A for switching the route in the special winning opening is also provided. A winning ball that has entered one of the winning balls (V winning area: special area) may be detected by the count switch 23 after being detected by the V winning switch. In this case, the game ball entering the other area is detected by the count switch 23 as it is.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning. Around the left and right of the game area 7, there are provided decorative lamps 25 blinking and displayed during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for absorbing a game ball that has not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In this example, a prize ball lamp 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut in the vicinity of the top frame lamp 28a. Is provided. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The card unit 50 includes, for example, a usable display lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit 50 is in a usable state, a connection table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit, and a card unit. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for releasing the card unit is provided.

  A game ball launched from the ball striking device by the player's operation enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 starts variable display (variation) if the variable display of the symbol can be started. If the variable display of the symbol cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 8 stops when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins. Further, the generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). In this embodiment, the case where a predetermined number of continuation rights are allowed is allowed unconditionally, but the continuation rights are allowed to be generated on condition that the game ball has won a predetermined V winning area. You may do it. When the V winning area is provided, if a game ball wins the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch while the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released. It may be performed again. Further, without providing the V winning area, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be always allowed to be released up to the final round (for example, up to 15 rounds).

  When the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (probability variation symbol) with a probability variation, the probability of the next jackpot increases. That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 enters a state in which the normal symbol is variably displayed. Further, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. Change to an advantageous state. It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine as seen from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the gaming machine, a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer and the like are mounted. A game control board (main board) 31 is installed. In addition, a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control is mounted is installed. The production control microcomputer controls the variable display device 9 provided on the game board 6, and various decoration LEDs, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b provided on the frame side, and The lighting of the right frame lamp 28c is controlled, and the sound generation from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  Furthermore, a power supply board 910 and a launch board 90 on which a power supply circuit for creating DC30V, DC21V, DC12V and DC5V is mounted are provided. Although most of the power supply substrate 910 overlaps with the main substrate 31, there is an exposed portion that is exposed so as to be visible from the outside without overlapping the main substrate 31. In the exposed portion, the main board 31 and each electrical component control board (lamp control board, sound control board, presentation control board 80 and payout control board 37) in the gaming machine 1 and each electrical component ( A power switch is provided as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off power supply to a component that operates when power is supplied. Furthermore, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch in the exposed portion (inside the substrate).

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, variable display device 9, lamp, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming machine according to a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. The light emitter, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, description may be made by including the main board 31 in the electric component control board. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and a means for controlling the electrical components provided in the gaming machine according to a command signal from the game control means or the like. Point to. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate.

  On the back side of the gaming machine, a terminal board 160 provided with terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the gaming machine is installed above. The terminal board 160 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting prize ball information (prize ball number signal) and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided. Further, an information terminal board (information output board) 36 having terminals for outputting various information from the main board 31 to the outside of the gaming machine is installed near the center.

  The game balls stored in the storage tank 38 pass through the guide rail 39 and reach the ball payout device covered with the payout case 40A via the curve rod. A ball break switch 187 as a game medium break detection means is provided on the upper part of the ball payout device. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage. In the vicinity of the head). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects the shortage of game balls, the game machine is replenished to the game machine from the supply mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize and game balls based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball passage. Further, when the game ball is paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch 48 (not shown) as the storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as the storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device 97 (see FIG. 5) stops, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped. It should be noted that when the full tank switch is turned on, the operation of the ball hitting device is not stopped, and a full tank state notification (for example, a full tank state notification lamp for notifying whether or not the full tank state is present) May be lit). If it does so, a player can recognize that it is a full state by information.

  In this embodiment, the power supply board 910 and the payout control board 37 are installed on the game frame on the back of the gaming machine, and the main board 31 is installed on the game board 6 arranged inside the game frame.

  FIG. 4 is a front view (FIG. 4 (A)) and a cross-sectional view (FIG. 4 (B)) showing the ball dispensing device 97 covered with the dispensing case 40A. The ball payout device 97 is fixed to the lower part of the passage body installed between the ball break switch 187 and the ball payout device 97. The passage body has a ball passage for flowing down two rows of game balls in which the flow direction is changed to the left and right directions by the curve saddle. A ball break switch 187 is installed on the upstream side of the ball passage. In practice, a ball break switch is installed in each ball passage. The ball break switch 187 detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball passage. When the ball break switch 187 no longer detects a game ball, the ball discharge device 97 has a payout motor (not shown in FIG. 4). The rotation is stopped and the payout of the game ball is immobilized.

  The ball break switch 187 is locked by a locking piece at a position where it can be detected that 27 to 28 game balls are present in the ball path.

  In the ball payout device 97, a payout motor (not shown) using a stepping motor rotates, for example, a cam, thereby paying out one winning ball or one game ball based on a ball lending request. Further, below the ball payout device 97, for example, a payout number count switch 301 using a proximity switch is provided. Each time one game ball falls from the ball payout device 97, the payout number count switch 301 is turned on. That is, the payout number count switch 301 detects a game ball actually paid out from the ball payout device 97. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer can count the number of game balls actually paid out by the detection signal of the payout count switch 301. In this example, the payout number count switch 301 detects both the paid-out prize balls and rental balls. That is, the payout of prize balls and the payout of rental balls are detected by the same detection means. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. However, the payout of the winning ball and the payout of the rental ball may be detected by separate detection means.

  In this embodiment, the ball payout device 97 is configured to perform both prize ball payout and ball lending. However, a ball payout device for paying out a prize ball and a ball payout device for lending a ball may be provided separately. When separately provided, the payout means is composed of a ball payout device for paying out a prize ball and a ball payout device for lending a ball. Further, for example, the configuration may be such that the prize ball payout and the ball lending are separated by changing the rotation direction of the cam or sprocket, or the ball payout device 97 exemplified in the present embodiment (the cam is rotated by the motor). The present invention can be applied to any structure other than the structure).

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, a lamp driver board 35, an audio output board 70, an interface board 66, a relay board 77, and an effect control board 80 mounted on the gaming machine. The main board 31 includes a basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 14a, a count switch 23, and winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. , And an input driver circuit 58 that supplies a signal from the total winning counting switch 34 to the basic circuit 53, a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20, and a path in the big winning opening And an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21A for switching between the two in accordance with a command from the basic circuit 53.

  Note that the switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, and the all winning counting switch 34 may be referred to as sensors. That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. Each of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a that perform winning detection is also a winning detection means that detects the winning of a game ball in the winning area. Note that even if a passing gate such as the gate 32 is used, if a prize ball is paid out, a game ball entering the passing gate becomes a winning and a switch provided on the passing gate (for example, The gate switch 32a) becomes a winning detection means.

  In this embodiment, the case where a predetermined number of continuation rights is allowed without condition is described. However, the continuation right is allowed to be generated on condition that the game ball has won a predetermined V winning area. You may do it. When the V winning area is provided, the game balls that have won the V winning area are detected by the V winning switch and also by the count switch 23. In this case, the number of game balls won in the big winning opening corresponds to the number detected by the count switch 23. However, the game balls won in the V prize area are detected only by the V prize switch, and the number of game balls won in the big prize opening is the sum of the number detected by the V prize switch and the number detected by the count switch 23. It may be made to become. Further, the V winning area may not be provided, and a continuation right may always be generated in rounds other than the final round.

  The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as storage means (variation data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory, and a control operation according to the program. A game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 is included. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 refers to a central processing unit (a portion excluding storage means such as the ROM 54 and RAM 55, the I / O port unit 57, etc.) of the basic circuit 53 that operates according to a program. Main processing and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing and interrupt processing by an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505) are executed. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a portion of the basic circuit 53 including a storage means such as a ROM 54 and a RAM 55, a random number circuit 503, a serial communication circuit 505, an I / O port unit 57, etc. in addition to the CPU 56. It transmits and receives various data to and from the microcomputer mounted on each board (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80).

  In this embodiment, expressions such as “the microcomputer transmits and receives” are used. Specifically, for example, when data transmission is performed, the CPU sets data in the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit, and The serial communication circuit transmits the data set in the transmission data register. In addition, the CPU transmits data via the I / O port unit. For example, when data reception is performed, the reception data is written into the reception data register of the serial communication circuit, and the CPU reads the reception data from the reception data register. In addition, the CPU receives data via the I / O port unit.

  In the present embodiment, a case where the game control microcomputer 560 performs serial communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the ROM 54, the RAM 55 serving as storage means as a work memory, and the I / O port unit 57 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is also input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer stop operating. It becomes a state. Accordingly, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output, and in the period in which the reset signal is at a low level, An operation stop signal for stopping the operations of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (including the main board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of electric component control boards, and a reset signal is output therefrom. May be supplied to another electric component control board.

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has decreased to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53 via the payout control board 37. A clear signal indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53.

  The hitting ball launching device for hitting and launching the game ball includes a launch motor 94 controlled by a circuit on the launch board 90, and the launch motor 94 rotates to launch the game ball toward the game area 7. A voltage (fire signal) for driving the fire motor 94 is supplied from the power supply board 910 to the fire board 90. In addition, a firing motor signal for driving the firing motor 94 is generated by the firing substrate 90 and transmitted to the firing motor 94. Specifically, the launch board 90 includes a drive signal generation circuit 92, and the drive signal generation circuit 92 generates a predetermined drive signal based on the launch signal supplied from the power supply board 910. The launch board 90 is equipped with an AND circuit 91, and the AND circuit 91 drives the launch motor 94 based on the drive signal generated by the drive signal generation circuit 91 and the VL signal from the payout control board 37. The firing motor signal is output. In this case, the AND 91 outputs a firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 when both the drive signal and the VL signal are on.

  The touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation knob (hitting ball handle) 5, and the touch sensor circuit (player touches the operation knob 5) mounted on the launch board 90. A circuit including a detection circuit or the like for detecting whether or not there is. A circuit on the launch board 90 (for example, a drive signal generation circuit 92 that generates a drive signal or an AND circuit 91 that outputs a launch motor signal) is displayed when the signal from the touch sensor circuit indicates an off state. The output of the firing motor signal from the AND circuit 91 is stopped, and the driving of the firing motor 94 is stopped. Note that the operation knob 5 is provided with a touch ring that adjusts the resilience and is a part that the player contacts. The launch board 90 is disposed between the touch ring and the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine, and is disposed in the vicinity of the touch ring. Specifically, the wiring length between the touch ring and the launch board 90 is shorter than the wiring length between the launch board 90 and the power supply board 910. In addition, you may enable it to adjust a resilient force using a variable resistor, without using a touch ring.

  The clear signal is branched in the main board 31 and is also supplied to the payout control board 37. Note that the state of the clear signal input by the game control microcomputer 560 via the input port may be output to the payout control board 37 via the output port.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control and the like of the variable display device 9 that receives and variably displays decorative symbols are performed.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 6, a payout control microcomputer 37 (an example of an electrical component control microcomputer) 370 including a payout control CPU 371 is mounted on the payout control board 37. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370. At least a part of the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 370 is backed up by a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 910. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all RAM areas are backed up. Therefore, even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the storage contents of the RAM are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged).

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 187, the full switch 48, and the payout count switch 301 are input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. A detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. . In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates that the ball is out of ball, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates that the ball is full. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 90 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. A launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 91 of the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94 is transmitted from the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 91 mounted on the launch board 90, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 92 is input to the input side of the AND circuit 91. Input to the other. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 91 is input to the firing motor 94. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 is stopped.

  The full control signal is not output from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the launch board 90. For example, the detection signal from the full switch 48 is branched on the payout control board 37 and input to the launch board 80 as it is. It may be. In addition, a signal line for inputting the detection signal from the full switch 48 to the discharge substrate 90 side is provided separately from the signal line for inputting the detection signal from the full control switch 37 to the discharge control substrate 37 side. You may make it input.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the output of the launch motor signal is stopped and the drive of the launch motor 94 is stopped to stop the launch of the game ball. However, the game is performed by a method other than the stop of the launch motor signal output. The ball firing may be stopped. For example, when a gaming machine includes a hitting ball supply device that supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device, output of a drive signal to the hitting ball supply device is stopped and driving of the hitting ball supply device is stopped while a full tank signal is being output. This may stop the launch of the game ball.

  When a game ball is won at the winning opening, a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is issued as a payout command signal from the serial communication circuit 505 (see FIGS. 8 and 60) of the game control microcomputer 560. Output (send). The award ball number command is composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and is output by asynchronous serial communication.

  The award ball number command is input to the serial communication circuit 380 (see FIG. 60). When a prize ball number command is input via the serial communication circuit 380, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs control for driving the ball payout device 97 to pay out the number of game balls indicated by the prize ball number command. A connection confirmation signal indicating that the main board 31 is connected is also output from the output circuit 67 of the main board 31. The prize ball number command corresponds to a payout command signal for designating the payout number.

  In addition, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has decreased below a predetermined value and a clear signal indicating that a clear switch for clearing the contents of the RAM has been operated are supplied from the power supply board 910 to the input port 372g. Entered. The power-off signal and the clear signal are output to the main board 31 via the output circuit 373B. Then, in the main board 31, it is input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68 and the I / O port 57.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 receives, via the output port 372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output to 160). A driver circuit is provided outside the output port 372b, but is not shown in FIG.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to the winning ball LED 51 and the ball running out LED 52 via the output port 372b. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, but is not shown in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 66 is connected to a frequency display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62 and a return switch 63 provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are given to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 50 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 37. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 37.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in the ON state, the winning ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 50 is supplied from the payout control board 37. That is, power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit 50 is performed via the payout control board 37 and the interface board 66. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 50 is provided in a 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 50 arranged in the interface board 66, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 50. It is prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example for transmitting signals transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. As shown in FIG. 7, the connection signal (VL signal) from the card unit 50 is input to the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66. The VL signal input to the payout control board 37 is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the photocoupler 161 mounted on the payout control board 37. Note that passive elements such as a resistor 162 and capacitors 163 and 164 are connected to the photocoupler 161.

  In this example, the output signal from the photocoupler 161 is branched and input to one input side of the AND circuit 165, and the full signal is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 165. The output of the AND circuit 165 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 91 mounted on the launch board 90. Therefore, when the output signal from the photocoupler 161 is at a low level, or when a low level full signal is output, it is connected to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 91 mounted on the launch board 90. The low level signal is input, and the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 is stopped regardless of the state of the drive signal input to the other input side of the AND circuit 91.

  A unit operation signal (BRDY signal) from the card unit 50 is input to the payout control board 37 via the photocoupler 66a mounted on the interface board 66, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 370. Similarly, a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal) from the card unit 50 is input to the payout control board 37 via the photocoupler 66b mounted on the interface board 66, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  Further, a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) from the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to the card unit 50 via the photocoupler 66 d mounted on the interface board 66. Similarly, a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) from the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to the card unit 50 via the photocoupler 66e mounted on the interface board 66.

  Since the photocoupler 161 for transmitting the VL signal transmitted from the card unit 50 to the payout control microcomputer 370 is mounted on the payout control board 37 as described above, the resistance connected to the photocoupler 161 is Passive elements such as the condenser 162 and the capacitors 163 and 164 can also be mounted on the dispensing control board 37, and no capacitor can be mounted on the interface board 66. Therefore, when any illegal circuit is attached to the interface board 66 or when the interface board 66 is replaced with an illegal board, the illegal action can be easily detected. In other words, if there is a capacitor on the interface board 66 that should not be mounted at all, it can be determined that some sort of fraud is being performed, so that fraud can be easily detected. , Will be able to prevent fraud.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a capacitor is mounted on an interface board as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-347054 (particularly FIG. 11). Therefore, when a fraudulent board having an illegal circuit for inputting an illegal signal to the payout control microcomputer is created on the interface board and the authorized interface board is replaced with the illegal board, the board is replaced. There was a problem that it was difficult to discover.

  For example, a fraudulent interface with a fraudulent circuit for inputting a signal for executing a payout operation to the payout control board, even if the winning board is not won or a ball lending request is not made. A substrate is assumed. Then, the unauthorized interface board is illegally attached, and a signal output command is issued from the unauthorized interface board to the payout control board by an operation from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, button operation, wireless communication operation). ) May be illegally acquired to illegally acquire game media. When creating an unauthorized interface board, a capacitor is required to stabilize the circuit (or the signal output from the unauthorized interface board) mounted on the unauthorized interface board. The element is mounted on the illegal interface board.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the capacitor is not mounted on the interface board 66 at all, it is easily determined whether or not the board is an illegal board only by checking whether or not the capacitor is mounted on the interface board. be able to. In addition, when the capacitors 163 and 164 of the VL signal line are mounted on the payout control board 37, the photocoupler 161 is also mounted on the payout control board 37. Therefore, between the interface board 66 and the payout control board 37. In this case, the signal path is not reciprocated unnecessarily, and space saving and the number of wires can be reduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7, only the photocoupler 161 to which the resistor 162 and the capacitors 163 and 164 are connected is mounted on the payout control board 37. However, the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 All the photocouplers 161 and 66a to 66d that transmit signals transmitted and received between them may also be mounted on the payout control board 37. With this configuration, when there is a photocoupler that should not be mounted at all on the interface board 66, it can be determined that some sort of fraud is being performed.

  Further, as described above, the output of the VL signal (lending request accepting device connection determination signal) from the photocoupler 161 mounted on the payout control board 37 is branched to drive the payout control microcomputer 370 and the firing motor 94. Therefore, the driving of the firing motor 94 can be stopped according to the transmission state of the VL signal by the photocoupler 161. As shown in FIG. 6, the VL signal transmitted by the photocoupler 161 branched by the payout control board 37 and transmitted to the launch board 90 and the drive signal generated by the drive signal generation circuit 92 are the AND circuit 91. Is input. For this reason, in this example, when the VL signal transmitted by the photocoupler 161 is in an off state (low level state), or when a low level full signal is output, the drive signal purification circuit 92 generates the signal. Regardless of the state of the drive signal, the firing motor signal that is the output signal from the AND circuit 91 is maintained in the OFF state. Therefore, when the photocoupler 161 is not transmitting the VL signal, the driving of the firing motor 94 is stopped.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board 31 and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 produces an effect control command using eight signal lines CD0 to CD7 for transmitting the effect control signal. Transmit to the control board 80. In addition, a signal line of an effect control INT signal for transmitting and receiving a strobe signal is also wired between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80.

  As shown in FIG. 8, wiring from the start port switch 14a is connected to the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with wiring from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 which is a big winning opening, and various switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a for detecting the winning of a game ball to other winning openings. It is connected. Further, the main board 31 is connected to a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and a wiring to the solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening. .

  The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58, and an output circuit 59. The game control microcomputer 560 operates in accordance with a clock circuit 501, a reset controller 502 that functions as a system reset means, a random number circuit 503a, 503b, a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that is used as a work memory, and a program. CPU 56, CTC 504 for sending an interrupt request signal (interrupt request signal by timer interrupt) to CPU 56, serial communication circuit 505 for performing asynchronous serial communication with microcomputers provided in payout control board 37 and effect control board 80, and I / O An O port unit 57 is incorporated.

  In this embodiment, the microcomputer on a board (for example, the payout control board 37 or the effect control board 80) different from the board (for example, the main board 31) on which the microcomputer incorporating the serial communication circuit 505 is mounted. Although the case where the serial communication circuit 505 is used for communication will be described, the serial communication circuit 505 may perform serial communication with another microcomputer included in the board on which the microcomputer incorporating the serial communication circuit 505 is mounted. For example, when two microcomputers having the same configuration are mounted on the same substrate, serial communication circuits built in the microcomputers may perform serial communication with each other.

The clock circuit 501 outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined period generated by dividing the system clock signal by 2 ⁷ (= 128) to the random number circuits 503a and 503b. When a low level signal is input for a predetermined period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and the random number circuits 503a and 503b to reset the game control microcomputer 560.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits 503a and 503b having different ranges of random value values that can be generated. The random number circuit 503a is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit 503a has a function of generating a random number having a value within a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 4095). The random number circuit 503b is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo-random number. The 16-bit random number circuit 503b has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated in 16 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 65535). In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits is described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include three or more random number circuits. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are comprehensively expressed, or when indicating either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, This is called a random number circuit 503.

  Next, the configuration of the random number circuit 503 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 9, the random number circuit 503 includes a counter 521, a comparator 522, a count value permutation changing circuit 523, a clock signal output circuit 524, a count value update signal output circuit 525, a random value read signal output circuit 526, a random number update. A system selection signal output circuit 527, a selector 528, a random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530, a random value storage circuit 531, an inversion circuit 532, a latch signal generation circuit 533, and a timer circuit 534 are included.

  In this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 determines whether or not the display result of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information is a specific display result (for example, the combination of display symbols of the special symbol display device 8 is a combination of jackpot symbols) A random number for jackpot determination is generated. When the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the specific display result is based on the random number generated by the random number circuit 503, the game state is changed to a specific game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state). Transition. It should be noted that a random number for determination other than the jackpot symbol, such as a random number for probability variation determination for determining whether or not the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is a probability variation, or a random number for variation pattern determination for determining a variation pattern for a special symbol. It may be used as

  The counter 521 receives a predetermined signal selected by the selector 528 and outputs a count value C in response to the signal input from the selector 528. In this case, the counter 521 inputs a predetermined initial value, and cyclically updates the count value C from the initial value to a predetermined final value according to a certain rule, and outputs it. Further, when the count value C is updated to the final value, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. In this embodiment, when a notification signal is output from the counter 521, the CPU 56 updates the initial value.

  In this embodiment, every time a signal is input from the selector 528 (every time a rising edge in the signal from the selector 528 is input), the counter 521 increments the count value C from “0” to “4095” by one. Count up. Further, when the counter 521 counts up the count value C to “4095”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. Then, the CPU 56 inputs a notification signal from the counter 521 and updates the initial value. Then, the counter 521 counts up the count value C again from the initial value updated by the CPU 56 to “4095”. Further, when counting up to “4095”, the counter 521 starts counting from “0” again. Then, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56 when it counts up to a value (final value) immediately before the updated initial value. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when all the count values are input, as will be described later. In this case, when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the count value to “0”.

  The comparator 522 determines whether the input count value is larger than the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value is larger than the random number maximum value (exceeded the random number maximum value). ), A notification signal may be output to the counter 521. In this case, for example, when the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value, the notification signal is output to the counter 521 before the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. . For example, consider a case where the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, when the counter 521 counts up from “0” to “256” and further outputs the count value “257”, the comparator 522 determines that the input count value “257” exceeds the random number maximum value “256”. Determine and output a notification signal to the counter 521. When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 updates the count value to “258” and outputs it without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. By repeatedly executing the above processing, the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value while inputting from the count value “257” to “4095”. Output a notification signal. The counter 521 repeatedly updates and outputs the count value without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524 while the notification signal is input from the comparator 522. By doing so, until the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1, the count value is controlled to be counted up from “257” to “4095” at a high speed, Control is performed so that random numbers from “257” to “4095” are skipped (not stored in the random value storage circuit 531).

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 includes a count value permutation change register (RSC) 536, an update rule selection register (RRC) 542, and an update rule memory 543. The count value permutation change register 536 stores count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation (order of arrangement from the initial value to the final value), which is the update order of the count value C counted up by the counter 521. . When the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 displays the count value C permutation that the counter 521 counts up and updates. The permutation is changed to a different permutation from when “01h” is not stored. In this case, when the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 switches the update rule used for changing the permutation of the count values. In addition, when the counter 521 starts updating the count value after switching the update rule used for changing the count value permutation, the count value permutation change data in the count value permutation change register 536 is initialized from “01h” by the CPU 56. The value is returned to “0 (= 00h)” (cleared).

  Instead of clearing the count value permutation change data by the CPU 56, the random number circuit 503 may clear the count value permutation change data. For example, when the register value is set in the update rule selection register (RRC) 542 based on the count value permutation change data “01h” being written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 The register value of the count value permutation change register 536 may be cleared.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the update rule selection register 542. As shown in FIG. The update rule selection register 542 is a register that sets an update rule used for rearranging the order of count values output from the counter 521 (changing the permutation). In this embodiment, by setting a register value in the update rule selection register 542, an update rule used for changing the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 is set. As shown in FIG. 10, the update rule selection register 542 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 3 can be written and read. In addition, the update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 4 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 4 to 7 of the update rule selection register 542, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 4 to 7 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  The value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 is changed from “0 (= 00h)” to “15” in response to the count value permutation change data “01h” being written in the count value permutation change register 536. (= 0Fh) ”is updated cyclically. That is, each time the count value permutation data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is incremented by “1” from “0”. Return to "0".

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the update rule memory 543. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the update rule memory 543 stores the value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 and the count value update rule in association with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 11, for example, when the register value 1 is set in the update rule selection register 542, it can be seen that the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 is changed using the update rule B. In FIG. 11, the update rule A is the same update rule as that by which the counter 521 updates the count value C, and is stored in the update rule memory 543 in association with the register value “0”. Also, in the update rule memory 543, update rules B to P different from the update rule in which the counter 521 updates the count value C are stored in association with the register values “1” to “15”.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 first counts from the counter 521 until the final count value “4095” is first input. The count value is output as it is according to the currently set update rule. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value update rule when the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 inputs the final value after the change (the value immediately before the initial value) from the counter 521, and updates the count value. Will be changed.

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 selects an update rule corresponding to the register value of the update rule selection register 542 from the update rule memory 543, and sets it as an update rule used for changing the count value permutation. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from the initial value of the count value to the final value according to the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value again from the initial value “0”. To do. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts counting in accordance with the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value in order from the changed initial value. The permutation from the initial value to the final value will be changed. Then, the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs a count value according to the changed permutation.

  In this embodiment, when the maximum random number to be generated is limited by setting the maximum random number in a random number maximum value setting register 535 described later, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 counts The value C is limited to the maximum random number or less, and the permutation is changed and output. For example, it is assumed that the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the update rule A to the update rule B to change the count value permutation. Shall. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation to “256 → 255” according to the update rule B based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522. → → → 0 "and output.

  As described above, when the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the update rule to use the permutation of the count value C. Change and output. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example in which the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of the count values output from the counter 521. As shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” into the count value permutation change register 536 at a predetermined timing. Then, 1 is added to the register value of the update rule selection register 542. For example, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is updated from “0” to “1”. When the register value is updated, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates the “update rule A” corresponding to the register value “0” before the update until the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521 for the first time. The count value is updated according to "." At this time, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values in a permutation of “0 → 1 →... → 4095” according to the update rule A.

  When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects “update rule B” corresponding to the updated register value “1” from the update rule memory 543. To set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input the count values after the initial value “0” from the counter 521 again, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of the count values according to the selected “update rule B” and outputs it. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “0 → 1 →... → 4095” to “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” and outputs the count value.

  Thereafter, the count value permutation change register 536 is reset in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting the count value updating operation in accordance with the updated update rule, as will be described later. Then, until the next count value permutation change data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 counts the permutation as “4095 → 4094 →. Continue to output values.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written again to the count value permutation change register 536 by the CPU 56, the register value of the count value permutation change register 536 is updated from “1” to “2”. When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects and sets “update rule C” corresponding to the register value “2” from the update rule memory 543. . When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input the count value after the initial value “0” again from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates and outputs the count value permutation in accordance with the “update rule C” selected and set. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” to “1 → 3 →... → 4095 → 0 →. Is output.

  As described above, after the count value permutation change register 536 is reset, the count value permutation data “01h” is written again in the count value permutation change register 536, so that the count value permutation can be further changed.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the count value permutation change register 536. The count value permutation change register 536 is a register that sets count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation of count values counted up by the counter 521. As shown in FIG. 13, the count value permutation change register 536 is a readable 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that only bit 0 can be written and read. That is, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 1 to 7 of the count value permutation change register 536, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 1 to 7 are “0 (= 0000000b)”.

  Note that the value of the count value permutation change register 536 is reset by the CPU 56 in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting a count value update operation in accordance with the updated update rule. In this case, the CPU 56 returns the value written in the count value permutation change register 536 from the count value permutation change data “01h” to the initial value “0 (= 00h)”.

  The comparator 522 includes a random number maximum value setting register (RMX) 535 that stores random number maximum value setting data for designating the maximum value of random R (random number maximum value). The comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value updated by the counter 521 according to the random number maximum value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 has a random number maximum value (for example, “00FFh”) indicated by the count value input from the counter 521 and the random number maximum value setting data (for example, “00FFh”) stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. 256 "). When the comparator 522 determines that the input count value is equal to or less than the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531.

  In this embodiment, the comparator 522 specifically performs the following control. The comparator 522 obtains the initial value of the count value from the CPU 56 when updating the initial value of the count value, and obtains the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number. For example, when the initial value of the count value is “157” and the maximum random number value is “256”, the comparator 522 calculates the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number value as “100”. The comparator 522 counts up how many count values have been input from the initial value as the count values are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the number of input count values from the initial value reaches “100”, the comparator 522 determines that all count values from the initial value “157” to the maximum value “256” have been input. Then, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input to the counter 521. By determining based on the number of count values, even when the count value permutation circuit 523 has changed the count value permutation, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the maximum random number or less. When all count values are input, a notification signal can be output to the counter 521.

  An operation in which the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value will be described. In this example, a case where the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects the update rule A and the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 will be described.

  While the counter 521 is updating the count value from “0” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In accordance with rule A, the count values from “0” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 receives the value of the random number maximum value “256” from the comparator 522, determines whether the count value input from the counter 521 is larger than the random number maximum value, and the update rule is changed. Even when it is set (for example, update rule B), the count values from “257” to “4095” are compared based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The data is not output to the device 522. For example, when the initial value is set to “0” and the count value is updated to the final value “256”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value of the counter 521. In this example, it is assumed that the initial value is changed to “50” by the CPU 56.

  Note that the comparator 522 may determine whether the count value is greater than the random number maximum value “256”, instead of the count value permutation changing circuit 523. In this case, for example, the comparator 522 determines whether or not the count value is greater than the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and determines that the count value is greater than the random number maximum value. Is output to the counter 521. When the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 before the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. By doing so, the comparator 522 counts up the count value from “257” to “4095” at high speed until the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. Thus, the counter 521 is controlled. By doing so, the count value is output to the random value storage circuit 531 only when the value from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 is less than “257”, and the value from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 is “257”. When the value is greater than or equal to “,” the count value can be updated at high speed.

  Based on the update rule A, while the count value is input from “0” to “255” from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 inputs the count value below the maximum random number “256”. Therefore, the input count value is output to the random value storage circuit 531 as it is. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches “256”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives an initial value (“0” in this example) of the count value from the CPU 56 when changing the initial value of the count value, and the random number maximum value (the main value) from the initial value “0”. In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “257”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 257, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to the counter 521. In this example, since the CPU 56 changes the initial value to “50”, the counter 521 does not reset the count value even when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, and the changed initial value “50”. The count value is updated.

  While the counter 521 updates the count value from the changed initial value “50” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 sets the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. Based on the update rule A, the count values from “50” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. Further, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 does not output the count values from “257” to “4095” to the comparator 522 based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. When the count value to be updated by the counter 521 makes one round (when updated 257 times), when the count value permutation change data is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 Change the permutation of count values and output. For example, when the update rule is changed to the update rule B, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation from “256 → 255 →... → 50” and outputs the result.

  While the count values from “256” to “50” are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value as it is to the random value storage circuit 531. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation change circuit 523 reaches “50”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives the initial count value (“50” in this example) from the CPU 56 when the initial count value is changed, and the random number maximum value (this In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “207”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 207, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to counter 521.

  Even when the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when the number of count values reaches 207. By doing so, even if the permutation of the count values is changed, the notification signal is counted based on the input of all the count values from the initial value “50” to the maximum value “256”. 521 can be output.

  When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the initial value of the count value and returns it to “0”. Then, the counter 521 updates the count value from “0”. When the value of the counter 521 is updated again from “0”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values from “49” to “0” to the comparator 522 based on the count value from the counter 521. The comparator 522 outputs the count value to the random value storage circuit 531 based on the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value (“49” in this example), the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the initial value of the count value of the counter 521 is changed again by the CPU 56.

  By repeating the operation as described above, the comparator 522 causes the counter 521 to continuously count up the count value from “0” to the random number maximum value “256”, and the value from “0” to “256”. Is stored in the random value storage circuit 531 as a random R (random number value). That is, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the random number maximum value “256” or less, and causes the counter 521 to update the count value.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535. FIG. 14A shows an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535 installed in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. FIG. 14B shows an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535 installed in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. First, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “4095 (= 0FFFh)”. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured so that bits 0 to 11 can be written and read. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured such that bits 12 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, even if control is performed to write values to bits 12 to 15 of the random number maximum value setting register 535, the values read from bits 12 to 15 are all “0 (= 0000b)”. It is.

  The random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 has a predetermined lower limit value. In this embodiment, when random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the random number maximum value setting register. The random number maximum value setting data “0FFFh” for specifying the initial value “4095” is set again in 535. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “256” to “4095”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system reset by the reset controller 502. Instead of controlling the CPU 56 to disable writing, the random number maximum value setting register 535 may be formed so that writing is not possible until a reset signal is input after data is written.

  Next, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b will be described. As shown in FIG. 14B, in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “65535 (= FFFFh)”. Further, in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured in a state in which all bits 0 to 15 can be written and read.

  When random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “01FEh” for designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “512” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the initial value in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value setting data “FFFFh” specifying the value “65535” is reset. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “512” to “65535”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “512” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “65535”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system reset by the reset controller 502. Instead of controlling the CPU 56 to disable writing, the random number maximum value setting register 535 may be formed so that writing is not possible until a reset signal is input after data is written.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 includes a cycle setting register (RPS) 537 for storing cycle setting data for designating the cycle of the clock signal output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532 (that is, the count value update cycle). The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 based on the cycle setting data stored in the cycle setting register 537, and generates a random number circuit. A clock signal (random number generating clock signal SI1) used to generate a random number value is generated inside 503. By doing so, the clock signal output circuit 524 operates to output the random number generation clock signal SI1 for updating the count value C to the counter 521 on condition that the clock signal has been input a predetermined number of times. . The period setting data is data for setting how many times the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 is to be divided. The clock output circuit 524 outputs the generated random number generating clock signal SI1 to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532. For example, when the cycle setting data “0Fh (= 16)” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 by 16, and generates random numbers. A clock signal SI1 is generated. In this case, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is “cycle of system clock signal × 128 × 16”.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the period setting register 537. As shown in FIG. 15, the cycle setting register 537 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “256 (= FFh)”. The cycle setting register 537 is configured in a state where both writing and reading are possible.

  In addition, a predetermined lower limit value is determined for the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537. In this embodiment, when the cycle setting data “00h to 06h” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the CPU 56 In 537, the cycle setting data “07h” for specifying the lower limit value “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” is reset. That is, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”, and the CPU 56 is set to a value smaller than the lower limit value. If it is determined that the cycle setting data is correct, the cycle setting data is reset. The CPU 56 controls the period setting register 537 in which the period setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502. Instead of controlling the CPU 56 to disable writing, the period setting register 537 may be formed so that writing is not possible until a reset signal is input after data is written.

  Note that, without setting the cycle setting data as the lower limit value in the cycle setting register 537, based on the set cycle setting data, for example, the clock signal output circuit 524 directly supplies the reference clock signal CLK to the counter 521 and the inverting circuit 532. You may make it output. In this case, the CPU 56 does not need to perform processing for setting the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537 by comparing it with the lower limit value. The counter 521 updates the count value C every time the reference clock signal CLK is input from the clock signal output circuit 524.

  The count value update signal output circuit 525 includes a count value update register (RGN) 538 that stores count value update data “01h”. The count value update data is data for requesting update of the count value. The count value update signal output circuit 525 outputs the count value update signal SI3 to the selector 528 in response to the count value update data “01h” being written in the count value update register 538.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the count value update register 538. As shown in FIG. 16, the count value update register 538 is an unreadable 8-bit register and is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the count value update register 538, it is invalidated.

  The random value read signal output circuit 526 includes a random value take-in register (RLT) 539 for storing random value take-in data “01h”. The random value acquisition data is data for requesting acquisition of the count value to the random value storage circuit 531. The random value read signal output circuit 526 generates a random value read signal for requesting reading of the random value in response to the random value fetch data “01h” being written in the random value fetch register 539. Output to the circuit 533.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the random number fetch register 539. As shown in FIG. 17, the random value fetch register 539 is an unreadable 8-bit register. The random value fetch register 539 is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. In other words, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the random value fetch register 539, it is invalidated.

  The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 includes a random number update method selection register (RTS) 540 that stores random number update method selection data. The random number update method selection data is data for designating one of the random number update methods that is a method for updating the value of the random R. The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 responds to the random number update method selection data written in the random number update method selection register 540 with a random number corresponding to the random number update method specified by the written random number update method selection data. The update method selection signal is output to the selector 528 and the latch signal generation circuit 533.

  FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number update method selection register 540. As shown in FIG. 18A, the random number update method selection register 540 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “00h”. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 1 can be written and read. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 2 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 2 to 7 of the random number update method selection register 540, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 2 to 7 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram of an example of random number update method selection data written to the random number update method selection register 540. As shown in FIG. 18B, the random number update method selection data is composed of 2-bit data. The random number update method selection data “01b” is used to specify the first random number update method. The random number update method selection data “10b” is used to specify the second random number update method. In this embodiment, the first random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the count value update signal SI3 from the count value update signal output circuit 525. The second random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, when the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” is written in the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 is ready to be activated. On the other hand, when the random number update method selection data “00b” or “11b” is written to the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 cannot be activated.

  The selector 528 selects either the count value update signal SI 3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525 or the random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs the selected signal to the counter 521. When a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a first random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the first random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a count value update signal. The count value update signal SI3 output from the circuit 525 is selected and output to the counter 521. On the other hand, when a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a second random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the second random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a clock signal. The random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the circuit 524 is selected and output to the counter 521. When the first update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 receives a clock signal according to the count value update signal SI3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525. A numerical value update instruction signal for instructing update of numerical data synchronized with the random number generation clock signal SI1 output from the output circuit 524 may be output to the counter 521.

  The random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 includes a random number circuit activation register (RST) 541 that stores random number circuit activation data “80h”. The random circuit activation data is data for requesting activation of the random number circuit 503. When the random number circuit activation data “80h” is written in the random number circuit activation register 541, the random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 outputs a predetermined random number circuit activation signal to the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 537, and the counter 521 and the clock The signal output circuit 524 is turned on. The random number circuit 503 is activated by starting the count value updating operation by the counter 521 and the internal clock signal output operation by the clock signal output circuit 524.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the random number circuit activation register 541. As shown in FIG. 19, the random number circuit activation register 541 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “00h”. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured such that only bit 7 can be written and read. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured in a state in which bits 0 to 6 cannot be written or read. That is, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 0 to 6 of the random number circuit activation register 541, the value is invalid, and all values read from bits 0 to 6 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  The random value storage circuit 531 is a 16-bit register, for example, and stores a random R value that is a random number used in the jackpot determination in the game control process. The random value storage circuit 531 stores the count value C output from the counter 521 via the comparator 522 as a random R value in response to the input of the latch signal SL from the latch signal generation circuit 533. Each time the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random value storage circuit 531 reads the count value C updated by the counter 521 and stores the random R value.

  FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration example of the random value storage circuit 531. As shown in FIG. 20, the random value storage circuit 531 includes two AND circuits 201 and 203, two NOT circuits 202 and 204, 16 flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and 16 OR circuits. 2201-2216.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is connected to the output terminal of the latch signal generation circuit 533 and the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the flip-flop circuit 2101. Are connected to clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203.

  The input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 204. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 204 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 203, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 and one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  Input terminals D1 to D16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to an output terminal of the comparator 522. The clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminals Q1 to Q16 are connected to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  The input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204 and the output terminals of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and the output terminals are connected to the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560. .

  The operation of the random value storage circuit 531 will be described. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random value storage circuit 531 and the timing at which the random value storage circuit 531 outputs each signal. As shown in FIG. 21, when the output control signal SC (high level signal in this example) is not input from the CPU 56 mounted in the game control microcomputer 560 (that is, to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203). When the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (when the input is at the low level) (at the timings T1, T2, and T7 in the example illustrated in FIG. 21), the input to the two input terminals of the AND circuit 201 is performed. Both inputs are high. Therefore, the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a high level. The signal SR output from the AND circuit 201 is input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116.

  The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 respond to the rising edges of the signal SR input from the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16, and receive the bit data C1 to C1 of the count value C input from the comparator 522 via the input terminals D1 to D16. C16 is latched and stored as bit data R1 to R16 of a random value. The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 output random R bit data R1 to R16 to be stored from the output terminals Q1 to Q16.

  When the output control signal SC is not input (in the example shown in FIG. 21, the period up to the timing T3 and the period after the timing T6), the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the low level. The signal SG output from the output terminal of the circuit 203 is at a low level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The circuits 2201 to 2216 output high level signals. That is, the signals SO1 to SO16 output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level regardless of whether the values of the input random R bit data R1 to R16 are “0” or “1”. (“1”). By doing so, the value output from the random value storage circuit 531 is always “65535 (= 1111111111111111b)”, and the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, even if an attempt is made to read a random number from the random value storage circuit 531, only the same value “65535” can always be read from the random value storage circuit 531, and when the output control signal SC is not input, the random value storage circuit 531 becomes an unreadable (disabled) state. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as the random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each big hit determination shown in FIG. 40, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  When the latch control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 when the latch signal SL is not input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (in the example shown in FIG. 21, the period from the timing T4 to the timing T6), Since the inputs to the two input terminals are both at the high level, the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the high level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a low level signal. A low level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, when the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level, the output from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is high. A level signal is output. In addition, when a signal input to the other input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, a low level signal is output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216. That is, the values of the random R bit data R1 to R16 input to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are unchanged from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 (that is, the values of the bit data R1 to R16 are “ “1” is output when it is “1” and “0” when it is “0”). By doing so, random R can be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 is in a readable (enable) state.

  However, if the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 before the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at a low level. Even if the output control signal SC is input in the state where the signal SL is input (in the example shown in FIG. 21, in the period from the timing T3 to the timing T4), the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203. Remains low. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The signals SO1 to SO16 output from the circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level. Even though the output control signal SC is input, the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the latch signal SL is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the output control signal SC. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as the random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  In addition, when the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 before the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a low level. Even if the latch signal SL is input while the control signal SC is being input (timing T5 in the example shown in FIG. 21), the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 remains at the low level. It becomes. Therefore, the signal SR input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 does not rise from the low level to the high level, and the random R bit data R1 to R16 stored in the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116. Although the latch signal SL is input, the stored random number is not updated. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the latch signal SL.

  The inverting circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 in which the polarity of the clock signal is inverted by inverting the signal level in the random number generating clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, the inverting circuit 532 outputs the generated inverted clock signal SI2 to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  The latch signal generation circuit 533 is configured using a selector, a flip-flop circuit, and the like. The latch signal generation circuit 533 receives the random number read signal from the random number read signal output circuit 526 and the inverted clock signal SI2 from the inversion circuit 532, and stores the random value in the random value storage circuit 531. SL is output. The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL in accordance with the random value update method designated by the random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. In this case, when the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 selects the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532, and the latch signal It outputs to the random value storage circuit 531 as SL. On the other hand, when the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526. In synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the circuit 532, the latch signal SL is output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  The timer circuit 534 inputs a winning detection signal SS indicating that a winning of a game ball to the starting port 14 has been detected from the starting port switch 14a. The timer circuit 534 measures the time during which the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a. Then, when the measurement time reaches a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms), the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value capture data “01h” in the random value capture register 539 of the random value read signal output circuit 526. For example, the timer circuit 534 is configured by an up counter or a down counter that is activated in response to the input of a high level signal. The timer circuit 534 receives the reference clock signal CLK sequentially input from the clock circuit 501 while the input from the start port switch 14a is at a high level (that is, while the winning detection signal SS is continuously input). Count up or down. Then, when the count value to be counted up or down reaches a value corresponding to 3 ms, the timer circuit 534 determines that the winning detection signal SS is input from the start port switch 14a, and receives the random number value capture data “01h”. Write to the random value fetch register 539.

  Next, the configuration of the serial communication circuit 505 will be described. The serial communication circuit 505 is a data format using a full duplex method, an asynchronous method, and standard NRZ (non-return zero) encoding, Perform serial communication. The serial communication circuit 505 includes a transmission unit that transmits various data (for example, a prize ball number command and an effect control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and various data (for example, a prize ball ACK) from the microcomputer of each control board. Command).

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505. The serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, two status registers 705 and 706, three control registers 707, 708, and 709, a transmission data register 710, a reception data register 711, a transmission shift register 712, and a reception. Shift register 713, interrupt control circuit 714, transmission format / parity generation circuit 715, and reception format / parity check circuit 716. As shown in FIG. 22, the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, a status register A 705, control registers 707, 708, and 709, and a transmission data register 710, among these components. , A transmission shift register 712, an interrupt control circuit 714, and a transmission format / parity generation circuit 715. 23, the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, status registers 705 and 706, control registers 707, 708, and 709, received data, among these components. The register 711, the reception shift register 713, the interrupt control circuit 714, and the reception format / parity check circuit 716 are configured.

  In the serial communication circuit 505, the transmission unit and the reception unit are actually configured using a common circuit. As described above, the serial communication circuit 505 functions as a transmission circuit or a reception circuit by properly using each component of the serial communication circuit 505.

  First, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 with the microcomputer mounted on each control board will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a data format of data transmitted / received by the serial communication 505 to / from a microcomputer mounted on each control board. As shown in FIG. 24, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 is configured with a start bit, data, and stop bits as one frame. Further, the data length of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 can be set to either 8 bits or 9 bits by performing an initial setting in a serial communication circuit setting process described later. FIG. 24A shows an example of a data format when the data length is set to 8 bits. FIG. 24B shows an example of a data format when the data length is set to 9 bits.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the data format of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 is a start bit (logic “0”) indicating the start of one frame after an idle line of high level (logic “1”). ")including. The data format includes 8-bit or 9-bit transmission / reception data after the start bit. The data format includes a stop bit (logic “1”) indicating the end of one frame after transmission / reception data.

  The serial communication circuit 505 transmits / receives data first from the least significant bit (bit 0) of transmission / reception data according to the data format shown in FIG. Further, if initial setting is performed in a serial communication circuit setting process described later, it is possible to set so that a parity bit is added to transmission / reception data. When a setting is made to add a parity bit, the most significant bit of the transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit (odd parity or even parity). For example, when the data length is set to 8 bits, bit 7 of transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit. For example, when the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 8 of transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit.

  The baud rate generation circuit 703 generates a baud rate used by the serial communication circuit 505 based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 and a setting value (also referred to as a baud rate setting value) set in the baud rate register 702. In this case, the baud rate generation circuit 703 obtains the baud rate using a predetermined calculation formula based on the clock signal and the baud rate setting value. For example, the baud rate generation circuit 703 obtains the baud rate used by the serial communication circuit 505 using equation (1).

Baud rate = clock frequency / (baud rate set value x 16) Equation (1)

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the baud rate register 702. The baud rate register 702 is a register that sets a predetermined setting value for designating a baud rate value generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703. For example, it is assumed that the baud rate register 702 obtains the baud rate using the equation (1) and the clock frequency is 3 MHz. In this case, if the desired target baud rate is 1200 bps, the setting value “156” is set in the baud rate register 702. Then, the baud rate generation circuit 703 generates the baud rate “1201.92 bps” using the equation (1) based on the clock frequency “3 MHz” and the baud rate set value “156”. The baud rate register 702 is a 16-bit register, and an initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The baud rate register 702 is configured such that bits 0 to 12 can be written and read. Further, the baud rate register 702 is configured such that bits 13 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if a control for writing a value to bits 13 to 15 of the baud rate register 702 is performed, it is invalid, and all the values read from the bits 13 to 15 are “0 (= 000b)”.

  FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register A707. The control register A 707 is a register for setting the communication format of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the communication format of the serial communication circuit 505 is set by setting the value of each bit of the control register A707. In the control register A707, communication format setting data for setting a communication format such as a data format of transmission / reception data and various communication methods is set. As shown in FIG. 26A, the control register A707 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register A 707 is configured such that bits 0 to 4 can be written and read. Control register A 707 is configured such that bits 5 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 5 to 7 of the control register A707, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 5 to 7 are “0 (= 000b)”.

  FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram of an example of communication format setting data set in the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 26B, setting data for setting the data length of data to be transmitted and received is set in bit 4 (bit name “M”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 26B, by setting bit 4 to “0”, the data length of the transmission / reception data is set to 8 bits. Further, by setting bit 4 to “1”, the data length of the transmission / reception data is set to 9 bits.

  In bit 3 (bit name “WAKE”) of control register A707, setting data for setting a wake-up method for waking up a receiver circuit in the standby state (reception unit of serial communication circuit 505). Is set. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), by setting bit 3 to “0”, an idle line wakeup method for wakeup when an idle line is recognized is set. In addition, by setting bit 3 to “1”, an address mark wakeup method for wakeup by recognizing a predetermined address mark is set.

  In bit 2 (bit name “ILT”) of the control register A707, setting data for selecting an idle line detection method of received data is set. As shown in FIG. 26B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, a detection method for detecting an idle line after the start bit included in the received data is set. In addition, by setting bit 2 to “1”, a detection method for detecting an idle line after a stop bit included in received data is set.

  Setting data for setting whether or not to use the parity function is set in bit 1 (bit name “PE”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 26B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the parity function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the parity function is set to be used.

  Setting data for setting the type of parity when the parity function is used is set in bit 0 (bit name “PT”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 26B, by setting bit 0 to “0”, even parity is set as the parity type. Also, by setting bit 0 to “1”, odd parity is set as the parity type.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register B708. The control register B 708 is a register for setting whether to permit an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, whether the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted or prohibited is set by setting the value of each bit of the control register B708. In the control register B708, interrupt request setting data indicating whether or not various interrupt requests are permitted is mainly set. In addition to the interrupt request setting data, setting data for performing various settings of the serial communication circuit 505 is also set in the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 27A, the control register B 708 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register B 708 is configured such that bits 0 to 7 can be written and read.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of interrupt request setting data set in the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 27 (B), setting data indicating whether or not a transmission interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed at the time of data transmission, is permitted is set in bit 7 (bit name “TIE”) of the control register B708. Is done. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 7 to “0”, the transmission interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 7 to “1”, the transmission interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 6 (bit name “TCIE”) of the control register B708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a transmission completion interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be made when data transmission is completed. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 6 to “0”, the transmission completion interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 6 to “1”, the transmission completion interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 5 (bit name “RIE”) of the control register B 708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not a reception interrupt request, which is an interrupt request when data is received, is permitted. As shown in FIG. 27B, the reception interrupt request is set to be prohibited by setting bit 5 to “0”. Further, by setting bit 5 to “1”, the reception interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 4 (bit name “ILIE”) of the control register B708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not an idle line interrupt request that is an interrupt request to be performed when an idle line of received data is detected is permitted. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 4 to “0”, an idle line interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 4 to “1”, it is set to permit an idle line interrupt request.

  In bit 3 (bit name “TE”) of the control register B708, setting data indicating whether to use the transmission circuit (the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505) is set. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, the transmission circuit is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 3 to “1”, the transmission circuit is set to be used.

  In bit 2 (bit name “RE”) of the control register B708, setting data indicating whether or not to use the receiving circuit is set. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, the receiving circuit is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 2 to “1”, the receiving circuit is set to be used.

  Setting data indicating whether or not to use the wakeup function of the receiving circuit is set in bit 1 (bit name “RWU”) of the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the wakeup function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the wakeup function is set to be used.

  Setting data indicating whether or not to use a predetermined break code transmission function is set in bit 0 (bit name “SBK”) of the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 27B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the break code transmission function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the break code transmission function is set to be used. When bit 1 is set to “1”, the serial communication circuit 505 causes the microcomputer on which the control board (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80) is mounted with a break code (for example, a signal including “0” continuously). Send to.

  FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the status register A705. The status register A 705 is a register for confirming various statuses of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 can confirm various statuses of the serial communication circuit 505 by confirming the value of each bit of the status register A 705. As shown in FIG. 28A, the status register A705 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. In addition, the status register A705 is configured so that bits 0 to 7 can only be read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 to bit 7 of the status register A705, it is invalidated.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty) or transmission of transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 is completed, interrupt control is performed. Circuit 714 sets the corresponding bit in status register A705. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of each bit set in the status register A705.

  FIG. 28B is a diagram showing an example of status confirmation data stored in the status register A705. As shown in FIG. 28B, transmission data indicating that transmission data is not stored in transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty) in bit 7 (bit name “TDRE”) of status register A 705. Stores an empty flag. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 7, the transmission data is not yet transferred from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712, and transmitted to the transmission data register 710. Indicates that the data is still stored. When “1” is stored in bit 7, the transmission data is transferred from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712, and there is no transmission data in the transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty). ).

  Bit 6 (bit name “TC”) of the status register A 705 stores a transmission completion flag indicating that transmission of transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 has been completed. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 6, the transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 is being transmitted, and the transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 is not transmitted. Indicates that transmission has not been completed. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 6, the transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 has been transferred, and transmission of transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 has been completed. It shows that.

  Note that the transmission of the transmission data is completed, and the game control microcomputer 560 waits for a reception confirmation signal from the transmission destination microcomputer. In this embodiment, when a transmission interrupt is set as will be described later, the serial communication circuit 505 sets the bit 6 of the status register A 705 to “1” and confirms reception when detecting the completion of transmission of transmission data. An interrupt request (referred to as an interrupt request during transmission) is made to the CPU 56 as a signal waiting state.

  Bit 5 (bit name “RDRF”) of status register A 705 stores a reception data full flag indicating that reception data is stored in reception data register 711 (reception data full). As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 5, it indicates that the reception data register 711 contains no reception data. When “1” is stored in bit 5, the value of the reception shift register 713 is transferred to the reception data register 711, and reception data is stored in the reception data register 711 (reception data Full).

  When the reception data is stored in the reception data register 711, the CPU 56 is ready to perform reception processing by reading the reception data from the reception data register 711. In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 detects that the received data is full, the bit 5 of the status register A 705 is set to “1” and an interrupt request (interrupt upon reception) is made to the CPU 56 that reception processing is possible. Request).

  Bit 4 (bit name “IDLE”) of status register A705 stores an idle line detection flag indicating that the receiving circuit has detected an idle line. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 4, it indicates that the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 has not detected an idle line. When “1” is stored in bit 4, it indicates that the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 has detected an idle line.

  In bit 3 (bit name “OR”) of the status register A 705, the reception shift register 713 has received the next data before the CPU 56 reads the reception data stored in the reception data register 711 (overload). An overrun flag indicating (run) is stored. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected an overrun. If “1” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected an overrun.

  If an overrun occurs, the next received data is stored in the receiving shift register 713 before the received data in the received data register 711 is read, so that the received data is overwritten and the CPU 56 receives the received data. It cannot be read correctly. For this reason, communication with the microcomputer mounted on each control board cannot be performed correctly, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting an overrun, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 3 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 2 (bit name “NF”) of status register A 705 stores a noise error flag indicating that noise has been detected in the received data. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 2, it indicates that the receiving circuit is not detecting noise in the received data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 2, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected noise in the received data.

  For example, when detecting each bit of the received data, the serial communication circuit 505 detects “1” or “0” having a predetermined bit length using the baud rate generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703. In this case, when the detected length of “1” or “0” is less than the predetermined bit length, the serial communication circuit 505 detects a noise error as noise generated in the received data. When a noise error occurs, there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received due to the noise, which causes the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting a noise error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 2 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 1 (bit name “FE”) of the status register A 705 indicates that it is detected that the position of the stop bit of the received data is “0” (originally, the stop bit is “1”) (framing error). A framing error flag is stored. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 1, it indicates that the receiving circuit is not detecting a framing error in the received data. When “1” is stored in bit 1, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected a framing error.

  When a framing error occurs, it is in a state where the stop bit of the received data has not been correctly received, and therefore there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting a framing error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 1 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 0 (bit name “PF”) of the status register A 705 has a parity error flag indicating that the parity value obtained from the received data does not match the parity value included in the received data (parity error). Is stored. As shown in FIG. 28B, when “0” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected a parity error in the received data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected a parity error.

  When a parity error occurs, it is in a state where each data bit or parity bit of the received data has not been correctly received, so there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 detects a parity error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 0 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 on the assumption that an error has occurred during communication.

  FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the status register B706. The status register B 706 is a register for confirming the reception state (reception status) of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 can confirm the reception status of the serial communication circuit 505 by confirming the value of the bit of the status register B 706. As shown in FIG. 29B, the status register B 706 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, the status register B 706 is configured so that bit 0 can only be read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 of status register A 705, it is invalid. Status register B 706 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the status register A 705, the value is invalid and all the values read from bits 1 to 7 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  FIG. 29B is a diagram showing an example of status confirmation data stored in the status register B706. As shown in FIG. 29B, bit 0 (bit name “RAF”) of the status register B 706 stores a reception active flag indicating that the reception circuit is receiving reception data (reception active). . As shown in FIG. 29B, when “0” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the reception circuit is not receiving reception data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the reception circuit is receiving reception data. When the serial communication circuit 505 detects the start bit, it assumes that reception of received data has started, and sets bit 0 of the status register B 706 to “1”.

  FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register C709. The control register C709 is a register for setting whether to permit an interrupt request when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, by setting the value of each bit of the control register C709, it is set whether to permit or prohibit an interrupt request during communication from the serial communication circuit 505. In the control register C709, error interrupt request setting data indicating whether or not various interrupt requests at the time of a communication error are permitted is mainly set. In addition to the error interrupt request setting data, the control register C709 stores 9th bit data when the data length is set to 9 bits. Various settings of the serial communication circuit 505 are also set. As shown in FIG. 30A, the control register C709 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register C709 is configured such that bits 0 to 3 and bits 6 and 7 can be written and read. Further, the control register C709 is configured such that bits 4 and 5 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 4 and 5 of the control register C709, it is invalid, and all values read from bits 4 and 5 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of error interrupt request setting data set in the control register C709. As shown in FIG. 30B, the bit 7 (bit name “R8”) of the control register C709 stores the 9th bit of the received data when the data length is set to 9 bits. Further, bit 6 (bit name “T8”) of the control register C709 stores the ninth bit of transmission data when the data length is set to nine bits.

  In bit 3 (bit name “ORIE”) of the control register C709, setting data indicating whether or not to permit an overrun flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when an overrun is detected, is set. As shown in FIG. 30B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, the overrun flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 3 to “1”, the overrun flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 2 (bit name “NEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a noise error flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when a noise error is detected. As shown in FIG. 30B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, the noise error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 2 to “1”, the noise error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 1 (bit name “FEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a framing error flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when a framing error is detected. As shown in FIG. 30B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the framing error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the framing error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 0 (bit name “PEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a parity error flag interrupt request which is an interrupt request to be performed when a parity error is detected. As shown in FIG. 30B, the parity error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited by setting bit 0 to “0”. Further, by setting bit 0 to “1”, the parity error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a data register included in the serial communication circuit 505. The data register 701 is a register that stores data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505. As shown in FIG. 31, the data register is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Data register 701 is configured such that bits 0 to 7 can be written and read.

  In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 transmits transmission data, the data register is used as the transmission data register 710. When the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 6 of the data register and control register C709 is used as the transmission data register 710. In this case, bits 0 to 7 of the data register are used as bits 0 to 7 of the transmission data register 710, and bit 6 of the control register C709 is used as bit 8 of the transmission data register 710.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 receives received data, the data register is used as the received data register 711. When the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 7 of the data register and control register C709 is used as the reception data register 711. In this case, bits 0 to 7 of the data register are used as bits 0 to 7 of the reception data register 711, and bit 7 of the control register C709 is used as bit 8 of the reception data register 711.

  The interrupt control circuit 714 makes various interrupt requests to the CPU 56. In this embodiment, when the bit 6 (TCIE) of the control register B 708 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 notifies the CPU 56 when transmission of transmission data to the transmission data register 710 is completed. In addition to outputting an interrupt signal, an interrupt request is made by setting bit 6 (TC) of status register A705 to “1”. The interrupt control circuit 714 may output a different interrupt signal to the CPU 56 for each interrupt factor, instead of making the interrupt factor identifiable by the set value of the bit of the status register A705.

  In addition, when bit 5 (RIE) of the control register B 708 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 enters a state where reception data is stored in the reception data register 711 (when reception data full is detected). ), An interrupt signal is output to the CPU 56, and an interrupt request is made by setting bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A705 to “1”.

  Further, when any of the bits 0 to 3 of the control register C709 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 outputs an interrupt signal to the CPU 56 and also indicates the type of communication error. In response to this, an interrupt request is made by setting "1" to bits 0 to 3 of the status register A705. For example, if bit 3 (ORIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, “1” is set to bit 3 (OR) of the status register A705 when an overrun is detected and an interrupt request is made. To do. For example, when bit 2 (NEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a noise error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 2 (NF) of the status register A705. Set. For example, when bit 1 (FEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a framing error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 1 (FE) of the status register A705. Set. For example, when bit 0 (PEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a parity error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 0 (PF) of the status register A705. Set. When a plurality of communication errors are detected, the interrupt control circuit 714 makes an interrupt request based on the plurality of communication errors and sets the corresponding bits of the status register A 705 to “1”.

  The transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 generates a data format of transmission data. In this embodiment, the transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 generates a data format by adding a start bit and a stop bit to the transmission data stored in the transmission data register 710 and transfers the data format to the transmission shift register 712. When bit 1 (PE) of the control register A707 is set to “1” and the parity function is set to be used, the transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 adds a parity bit to the transmission data. Generate a data format.

  The reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the data format of the reception data. In this embodiment, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the start bit and the stop bit from the reception data stored in the reception shift register 713, detects the data portion included in the reception data, and receives the reception data register. Forward to 711. When bit 1 (PE) of the control register A707 is set to “1” and the parity function is set to be used, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 obtains the parity of the reception data and receives the reception data. It is detected whether or not it matches the parity included in. If the obtained value does not match the parity included in the received data, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects a parity error. If it is set in the serial communication circuit setting process to be described later that an interrupt request at the time of communication error is permitted, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the occurrence of the parity error and causes the CPU 56 to generate the communication error as an interrupt cause. Interrupt request.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map of a storage area in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 32, the area from address 0000h to address 1FFFh in the storage area of the game control microcomputer 560 is assigned to the ROM 54. An area from addresses 7E00h to 7FFFh is allocated to the RAM 55. Further, the area from the address FD00h to the address FE00h is allocated to a built-in register such as the random number maximum value setting register 535.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the area from address 0000h to address 1FFFh allocated to the ROM 54 includes a user program area and a user program management area. A program (user program) 550 created in advance by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) is stored in the user program area in the area of addresses 0000h to 1F7Fh. Further, data (user program execution data) necessary for the CPU 56 to execute the user program 550 is stored in the user program management area in the area of addresses 1F80h to 1FFFh. Of the areas 7E00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55, the areas 7E00h to 7EFFh are unused areas, and the areas 7F00h to 7FFFh are used as work areas.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the user program management area. As shown in FIG. 33, the initial value changing method selected by the user among the initial value changing methods which are methods for changing the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 is provided in the area of 1F97h. The initial value change method setting data for designating is stored. Further, in the areas 1F98h and 1F99h, RAM address data for specifying an address in the RAM 55 (designated RAM address) designated in advance by the user among addresses 7F00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55 is stored. The In this case, of the values indicating the designated RAM address, the lower value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F98h address, and the higher value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F99h address.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of an example of initial value change method setting data. As shown in FIG. 34, the initial value change data is composed of 8-bit data. The initial value change data “00h” is data specifying that the initial value is not changed as the initial value change method. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “00h” is set, the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value from a predetermined initial value “0” to a predetermined final value. Become. Further, the initial value change data “01h” is data specifying that the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to a value based on an ID number for identifying the game control microcomputer 560 as an initial value change method. It is. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “01h” is set, the initial value of the counter value updated by the counter 521 is changed from “0” to a value based on the ID number. The count value is updated from the initial value to a predetermined final value.

  The user program 550 stored in the user program area will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the user program 550. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the user program 550 includes a random number circuit setting program 551 composed of a plurality of types of program modules, a display result determination program 552, a count value permutation change program 554, A numerical value update program 555, a serial communication circuit setting program 556, and an interrupt priority setting program 557 are included.

  The random number circuit setting program 551 is a program for executing a random number circuit setting process for performing initial setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. That is, the CPU 56 functions as random number circuit initial setting means by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program 551.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the random number circuit setting program 551. As shown in FIG. 36, the random number circuit setting program 551 includes, as a plurality of types of program modules, a random number maximum value setting module 551a, a random number update method selection module 551b, a cycle setting module 551c, a random number circuit activation module 551d, An initial value changing module 551e and a random number circuit selecting module 551f are included.

  The random number maximum value setting module 551a is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the maximum value of the random R preset by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). The CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number maximum value setting module 551a, thereby writing random number maximum value setting data for specifying the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number maximum value setting register 535. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when “255” is set in advance as the maximum value of the random R by the user, the CPU 56 writes the random number maximum value setting data “00FFh” in the random number maximum value setting register 535 and the random R maximum value “255”. Is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number update method selection module 551b is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the random number update method (first random number update method or second random number update method) selected by the user. The CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” designating the random number update method selected by the user in the random number update method selection register 540 by executing the process according to the random number update method selection module 551b. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the random number update method selected by the user in the random number circuit 503. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting either the first random number update method or the second random number update method as the random number update method used by the random number circuit 503 for the random number update.

  The cycle setting module 551c is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user (that is, the cycle in which the clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the clock signal to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532). It is a module. The CPU 56 writes processing in the cycle setting register 537 for designating the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user by executing processing in accordance with the cycle setting module 551c. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when the cycle of the internal clock signal is set in advance as “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 16” by the user, the CPU 56 writes the cycle setting data “0Fh” in the cycle setting register 537 and sets the internal clock signal The period “system clock signal period × 128 × 16” is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number circuit activation module 551d is a program module for activating the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503 by writing the random number circuit activation data “80h” into the random number circuit activation register 541 by executing processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d.

  The initial value change module 551e is a program module for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521. The CPU 56 functions as an initial value changing unit by executing processing according to the initial value changing module 551e. The CPU 56 executes the initial value changing module 551e to change the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 by the initial value changing method selected by the user. By doing so, the CPU 56 has a function of selecting an initial value changing method.

  In this embodiment, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored in the area of address 1F97h in the user program management area, the CPU 56 sets the initial value of the count value for each game control microcomputer 560. The value is changed to a value calculated based on the assigned unique ID number.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the calculated value “150” obtained by adding the predetermined value “50” to the ID number “100” is set in advance as the ID number. Are stored in association with each other. Further, for example, the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100” is stored in advance in association with the ID number. Further, for example, only a predetermined value may be stored in advance in association with the ID number. Then, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 adds a value “150” obtained by adding an ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “50”) stored in advance, and sets the initial count value. The CPU 56 may also use a value “50” obtained by subtracting a predetermined value (eg, “50”) stored in advance from the ID number (eg, “100”) as an initial value of the count value. It is good.

  When the initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. By doing so, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved, and the initial value of the random number can be made difficult to recognize simply by looking at the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. . Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the transition condition to the big hit state from being illegally established by an action such as generating a captured signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine, and improving security. Can be improved.

  For example, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, adds a predetermined value to the ID number). The initial value of the count value is changed to the calculated value obtained. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may calculate a value that is randomly changed using a random number as an ID number, thereby randomly updating a value used for the calculation and obtaining an initial value. By doing so, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number circuit selection module 551f is a program module for setting a random number circuit to be used when executing a timer interrupt process including a game control process from among the random number circuits 503 built in the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 executes a process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f, so that any of the two random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is selected. Set whether to use when executing timer interrupt processing. For example, the CPU 56 uses a 12-bit random number circuit 503a or 16-bit as a random number circuit used when executing the timer interrupt process according to a predetermined set value (a value set in advance by the user) stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. The random number circuit 503b is set.

  Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may determine the variation pattern based on the random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and perform the jackpot determination based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. In this embodiment, the random value storage circuit 531 exists in each of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b (that is, a random-value storage circuit that stores a random number for 12 bits and a 16-bit random-number storage circuit). A random value storage circuit for storing random numbers exists separately). When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, the CPU 56 is provided in the RAM 55 with the random number read from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the random number read from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. Stored in separate buffer areas. Therefore, even when the timing for reading a random number from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the timing for reading a random number from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same, two different random numbers can be extracted and stored in different buffer areas.

  The random value update program 555 is a program for updating the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 when the first random number update method is selected as the random number update method. The CPU 56 functions as a random value updating unit by executing processing according to the random value updating program 555. When the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 executes the random number value update program 555 and writes the count value update data “01h” in the count value update register 538, whereby the count value is stored in the counter 521. And the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. When the second random number update method is selected as the random number update method, the counter 521 is updated with the random number generation clock signal output from the clock signal output circuit 537, and the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. The value of random R stored in is updated.

  The display result determination program 552 is a program for determining whether or not the display result in the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. The CPU 56 functions as a display result determination unit by executing processing according to the display result determination program 552.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 follows the display result determination program 552 in response to the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 15 and the condition (execution condition) for executing the variable symbol special display is established. Execute the process. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531, and determines whether or not the display result in the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the random R value or reads the random R value when the first random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 37, when the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the count value update data “01h” into the count value update register 538, thereby storing the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531. The value of R (for example, “2”) is updated. Then, the CPU 56 receives a random R value from the random value storage circuit 531 in response to the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 15 and the condition (execution condition) for executing the variable symbol special display is established. (For example, “2”) is read.

  When the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is further updated, an interval equal to or longer than the period of the system clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 has elapsed since the random R value was updated at the previous update. Sometimes, the count value update data “01h” must be written to the count value update register 538. This is because it is necessary to secure time for reading the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation in which the CPU 56 reads the value of the random R when the second random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 38, when the second random number update method is selected, the timer circuit 534 writes the random value fetch data “01h” in the random value fetch register 539, and the counter 521 outputs it. The count value (for example, “2”) is taken into the random value storage circuit 531 and the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value (for example, “2”) from the random value storage circuit 531.

  Specifically, when the second random number update method is selected, the counter 521 updates the count value C using the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 as a trigger. Thereafter, when the random value fetch data “01h” is written into the random value fetch register 539, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL to the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the random value storage circuit 531 reads and stores the count value output from the counter 521 with the input of the latch signal SL as a trigger. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531.

  If the timer circuit 534 does not write the random number value acquisition data “01h” to the random number value acquisition register 539, even if the counter 521 updates the count value, the random number value storage circuit 531 does not update the counter 521. Do not memorize numerical values. For example, the timer circuit 534 writes the random value take-in data “01h” into the random value take-in register 539, the count value “3” output from the counter 521 is taken into the random value storage circuit 531, and the random value storage circuit 531 , The random R value “3” stored therein is updated. In this case, the count value output from the counter 521 is updated from “3” to “4” or “5” unless the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value acquisition data “01h” into the random number acquisition register 539 again. However, the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is not updated, and the random value read from the random value storage circuit 531 remains “3”.

  The count value permutation change program 554 writes count value permutation change data “01h” to the count value permutation change register 536, and executes count value permutation change processing for changing the permutation of count values stored in the random value storage circuit 531. It is a program for. The CPU 56 functions as numerical data permutation changing means by executing processing according to the count value permutation changing program 554. The CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change program 554 and writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536, whereby the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs and inputs to the random value storage circuit 531. The permutation of the count values to be changed is changed.

  The serial communication circuit setting program 556 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for performing an initial setting for serial communication with a microcomputer (in this example, a payout control microcomputer) mounted on each control board in the serial communication circuit 505. It is a program to make it. That is, the CPU 56 functions as serial communication circuit setting means by executing processing according to the serial communication circuit setting program 556.

  The interrupt priority setting program 557 is a program for initially setting the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. That is, the CPU 56 functions as priority order initial setting means by executing processing according to the interrupt priority order setting program 556.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special figure holding memory 570, a big hit determination table memory 571, a flag memory 572, and a start winning port switch timer memory 573.

  In the special figure holding memory 570, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 15 and the execution condition of the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, but the variable display start condition is not yet satisfied (for example, the special symbol display device). 8 is a memory (storage area) for storing pending data including the number of times the execution condition for variable display is satisfied (8 is still executing variable display). The special figure holding memory 570 includes four entries. Each entry includes a holding number and a random R read from the random number storage circuit 531 according to the winning order in the order in which the game balls win the variable winning ball device 15. A value is stored in association with each other. In addition, each time the special symbol variable display in the special symbol display device 8 is finished once or the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display start condition based on the top information of the special symbol holding memory 570 is set. It is established, and variable display based on the top information of the special figure holding memory 570 is executed. In this case, when the condition for starting the variable display of special symbols is satisfied, the information registered in the second or lower place in the special figure holding memory 570 is moved up by one place. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the variable winning ball apparatus 15 during the variable display of the special symbol, the value of the random R read from the random value storage circuit 531 based on the new winning is the special R value. It is registered in the empty entry in the figure holding memory 570.

  The jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a plurality of jackpot determination tables used by the CPU 56 to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40A, the big hit determination table memory 571 stores a normal time big hit determination table 571a used in a gaming state other than the probability variation state (referred to as a normal state). Also, the jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a probability change jackpot determination table 571b used in the probability change state, as shown in FIG. Note that, when the jackpot determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIG. 40, the probability of determining the jackpot greatly varies depending on the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, for example, when the maximum value is set too small when the maximum value is set due to a malfunction, for example, when the normal big hit determination table 571a is used and when the probability change big hit determination table 571b is used. The difference in the probability of determining a big hit will be small, and the player's interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, a plurality of determination tables (a plurality of normal big hit determination tables 571a and a plurality of probability variation big hit determination tables 571b) are stored in the big hit determination table memory 571 in association with the random number circuit 503 and the random number maximum value. Also good. The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines the display result by using the random number circuit 503 to be used and the determination tables 571a and 571b corresponding to the maximum random number among the determination tables stored in the jackpot determination table memory 571. In accordance with the program 552, it may be determined whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. By doing so, even if the type of random number circuit 503 to be used and the maximum random number value are different, it is possible to control so that the probability of determining a big hit is somewhat the same.

  In the flag memory 572, various flags used in the game control process for controlling the progress of the game are set. For example, in the flag memory 572, a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state and a big hit flag indicating that the game state is a big hit state are set.

  The start port switch timer memory 573 stores a timer value that is added or cleared in accordance with the winning detection signal SS input from the start port switch 14a.

  41 and 42 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 41, the output port 0 is an output port for a payout control signal (in this example, a connection confirmation signal) transmitted to the payout control board 37. Further, 8-bit data (effect control signal) of the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 80 is output from the output port 1. Note that the logic (for example, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is on) shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 may be used. When the signal line between the control board 37 and the payout control board 37 is disconnected or when the cable is disconnected (including no cable connection), the payout control microcomputer 370 always detects “OFF”. Is defined. Specifically, generally, when disconnection or cable disconnection occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side, so the high level on the signal line between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is the game control means. The “logic” is determined to be in the off state at the output port. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit for logically inverting the signal is provided outside the output port on the main board 31.

  A solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball apparatus 20 for opening and closing the large winning opening, a solenoid (large winning opening guide plate solenoid) 21A and a variable winning ball apparatus for switching a route in the large winning opening A drive signal for a solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing 15 is output from the output port 2. An effect control INT signal (capture signal) for the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 80 is also output from the output port 2. The effect control INT signal is a signal for instructing the effect control means to capture (receive) 8-bit data of the effect control command.

  Then, various information output signals from the output ports 3 and 4 to the information terminal board 34 and the terminal board 160 through the information output circuit 64, that is, output data of information related to control are output.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 43, detection signals from the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, and 30a, and the start port switch 14a are input to bits 1 to 7 of the input port 0, respectively. . Further, the power-off signal from the payout control board 37 and the detection signal of the clear switch 921 are input to the bits 0 and 1 of the input port 1, respectively. When a V winning area is provided, a detection signal of a V winning switch (V count switch) is also input to an input port (for example, bit 0 of input port 0) in the game control means.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 44 and 45 show main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high-power signal is not output. By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to another control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed at the time of power-on that is not the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is performed. Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuits 503a and 503b (step S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs settings in accordance with the random number circuit setting program 551 to make the random number circuits 503a and 503b update the random R value.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15a). In this case, the CPU 56 performs processing according to the serial communication circuit setting program 556, thereby setting the serial communication circuit 505 to perform serial communication with the payout control microcomputer.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing to be executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). In this case, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing by executing processing according to the interrupt priority setting program 557.

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of an example of an interrupt processing priority table. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 is initially configured to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 according to the interrupt process priority table shown in FIG. Set. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt setting process, when a register is set, the interrupt is permitted. That is, by executing the timer interrupt setting process in step S16, the timer interrupt and the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are permitted.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S18). The CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the display random number update process is executed (step S17), and sets the interrupt enabled state when the display random number update process is completed (step S19). Note that the display random number is a random number for determining the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, and the display random number update processing is to update the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. It is processing.

  When the timer interrupt setting process is executed in step S16 and the interrupt enabled state is set, the timer interrupt or the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is executed until the process of step S17 is executed and the interrupt disabled state is set. It will be in a state to allow. When the processing of step S19 is executed in the loop processing of steps S17 to S19 and set to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt or serial is executed until the processing of step S17 is executed and the interrupt is disabled. An interrupt request from the communication circuit 505 is permitted. If a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. In addition, when an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process and reception) to be described later. Execute time interruption processing and transmission completion interruption processing). In the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt process is set before the timer interrupt or the interrupt request is set to be permitted by executing step S15b before the timer interrupt setting process of step S16. A process for setting or changing is performed.

  Note that the interrupt disabled state when the display random number update process is executed is also performed in the timer random process described later (that is, in step S23 of the timer interrupt process). This is to avoid conflict with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the process of step S18 and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt process, the continuity of the count value is impaired. There is a case. However, such an inconvenience will not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the process of step S18.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like can easily perform initial initialization by starting the power supply to the gaming machine (for example, turning on the power switch 914) while the clear switch 921 is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the random number circuit setting process (step S15) in the main process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing random number circuit setting processing. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and from among the random number circuits 503a and 503b built in the game control microcomputer 560, the game A random number circuit to be used when executing the timer interrupt process including the control process is set (step S151). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, designation information for designating the random number circuit 503 used when executing a timer interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 selects either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b according to the designation information stored in the predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, and uses the selected random number circuit when executing the timer interrupt process. Set as a random number circuit. Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, in step S151, whether or not each of a plurality of random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated can be used is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 performs the game control process using only the random number generated by one of the two random number circuits 503a and 503b, the random number is read from the random number circuit not used for the game control process. Processing or the like can be prevented, and the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  When the CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to be used in step S151, the CPU 56 stops the operation of the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524, for example, by not writing data to the random number circuit activation register 541 so that the random number circuit 503 is not used. The counter 521 of the set random number circuit is prevented from updating the count value C. Further, for example, the counter 521 of the random number circuit that is set not to use updates the count value C, but the CPU 56 does not output the output control signal SC so that the random number cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. You may control to. Further, for example, the CPU 56 prevents the random number value fetching data “01h” from being written in the random number fetching register 539 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used for the timer circuit 534, and the latch signal generation circuit 533 Control may be performed so that the latch signal SL is not output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  As described above, by setting the random number circuit 503 to be used, by setting only the random number circuit 503 to be used, the range of the random number value to be generated can be appropriately set. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when the big hit determination is performed using a determination table including a distant value (for example, “1” and “100”) as the big hit determination value, the big hit is determined with a predetermined big hit probability (for example, 1/100). In this case, the number of types of determination values to be processed is smaller when the random number by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is used than when the random number by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, and the game control microcomputer 560 is used. The control burden is reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number maximum value setting module 551a included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and generates random number maximum value setting data for designating a random number maximum value preset by the user as a random number maximum value setting register 535. (Step S152). By doing so, the random number maximum value of random R preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503. When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the random number maximum value (any value from “0” to “4095”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the maximum random number value (any value from “0” to “65535”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  In this embodiment, for example, when “0” to “255” are set as the random number maximum value of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, the random number maximum value is set to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later. Will be set again. Even when control is performed to write a value greater than “256” as the random number maximum value, values “0” to “255” are set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 due to data corruption or the like. In the case where it is lost, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later.

  As described above, since the maximum value of the random number to be generated is set in advance in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152, a random number having a value larger than the range of random numbers used during execution of the timer interrupt process is generated. Can be prevented, and the processing load of the random number circuit 503 and the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152 is not less than a predetermined lower limit value. A random number maximum value resetting process for resetting the random number maximum value set in 535 is executed (step S153).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a process according to the initial value change module 551e included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and executes an initial value change process for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step). S154).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number update method selection module 551b included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number update method selection data in the random number update method selection register 540 (step S155). By doing so, the random number update method of the random number circuit 503 is set. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “10h” in the random number update method selection register 540. That is, in this embodiment, the second random number update method is set as the random number update method of the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the cycle setting module 551c included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and sets the cycle setting data (the reference clock signal by how many minutes) that specifies the cycle of the random number generation clock signal SI1 preset by the user. The data for setting whether to circulate) is written in the period setting register 537 (step S156). By doing so, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S157). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a setting value indicating whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521. And stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. Whether or not the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value in accordance with a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. Set In this embodiment, when the CPU 56 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S157, the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (when a notification signal is input from the counter 521). An initial value update flag indicating that the initial value is updated is set. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which an initial value update flag is set according to a predetermined set value in step S157. Then, the CPU 56 updates the initial value of the count value output from the counter 521 based on the initial value update flag being set in the random number circuit initial value update process described later.

  Instead of changing the initial value of the count value by the CPU 56, the initial value of the count value may be changed to a predetermined value on the random number circuit 503 side based on the update of the count value to the final value. For example, the random number circuit 503 includes an initial value update data register that stores initial value update data indicating that the initial value is updated, and an initial value change circuit that changes the initial value. Value update data is set in the initial value update data register. In this case, when the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value, it outputs a notification signal to the initial value change circuit. Then, the initial value change circuit checks whether or not initial value update data is set in the initial value update data register. Then, when the initial value change circuit confirms that the initial value update data is set, the initial value change circuit changes the initial value of the count value to a predetermined value. Note that the initial value changing circuit may change the initial value of the count value whose permutation has been changed in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S158). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a set value indicating whether or not to change the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 when the count value is updated by the counter 521 to a predetermined final value according to a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. Set whether or not. In this embodiment, if the CPU 56 determines in step S158 that the permutation of the count values output from the counter 521 is to be changed, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value. The indicated count value permutation change flag is set. In this embodiment, the case where the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 according to a predetermined set value will be described. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Instead of changing the permutation of the count values under the control of the CPU 56, the permutation of the count values may be changed on the random number circuit 503 side based on the update of the count values up to the final value. For example, the random number circuit 503 includes a permutation change data register that stores permutation change data indicating that the permutation of count values is to be changed. In step S158, the CPU 56 sets the permutation change data in the permutation change data register. In this case, when the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value, the notification signal is output to the count value permutation change circuit 523, and the count value permutation change circuit 523 that has received the notification signal receives the permutation change data in the permutation change data register. Check whether it is set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 confirms that the permutation change data is set, it changes the permutation of the count values.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number circuit activation data “80h” in the random number circuit activation register 541 (step S159). By doing so, the CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503.

  Next, the random number maximum value resetting process (step S153) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the random number maximum value resetting process. In the random number maximum value resetting process, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 (step S153a). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the read random number maximum value is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (step S153b). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, the maximum random number value that can be set in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is from “256” to “4095”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from is lower limit value “256” or less. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, the maximum random number that can be set in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is “512” to “65535”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from the register 535 is equal to or lower than the lower limit “512”.

  When the read random number maximum value is less than or equal to the lower limit value, the CPU 56 resets the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 to a predetermined value (step S153c). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit “256”, the CPU 56 determines the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value set in is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit “512”, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value. The random number maximum value set in the register 535 is reset to a predetermined value “65535”.

  As described above, when the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is equal to or smaller than the predetermined lower limit value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number due to a malfunction of the game control microcomputer 560 or an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal for the game machine. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a random number having an excessively small value range from the minimum value to the maximum value is generated.

  In this embodiment, after setting the random number maximum value in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152, the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value reset processing in step S153 is less than or equal to a predetermined lower limit value. However, before setting the random number maximum value in the random number maximum value setting register 535, it may be determined whether it is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value. In this case, for example, when executing the process of step S152, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value indicated by the random number maximum value setting data preset by the user is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value. When the value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data is larger than the predetermined lower limit value, the CPU 56 writes the value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data in the random number maximum value setting register 535 as it is. When the value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data is equal to or less than the predetermined lower limit value, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined value (for example, “4095”) instead of the value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data. Write to register 535.

  Next, the initial value changing process (step S154) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the initial value changing process. In the initial value changing process, the CPU 56 first reads the initial value changing method setting data stored in the area 1F97h in the user program execution data area, and specifies the initial value changing method selected by the user. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the read initial value changing method setting data is “01h” (step S154a), thereby specifying the initial value changing method selected by the user.

  When the value of the initial value change method setting data is “01h”, the CPU 56 sets the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 to a value set based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560. Change (step S154b). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In step S154b, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. Further, for example, in step S154b, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, the ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “100”). The initial value of the count value is set to the calculated value (for example, “200”). When the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag indicating that the initial value of the count value has been changed (step S154c).

  When the CPU 56 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S154b, the CPU 56 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and the value set based on the ID number is determined. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the maximum random number. If it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the CPU 56 does not change the initial value input to the counter 521 (for example, resets the initial value to “0”). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If the value of the initial value change method setting data is not “01h” in step S154a (that is, the value of the initial value change method setting data stored in the area 1F97h of the user program execution data area is “00h”). In the case), the CPU 56 does not change the initial value of the count value, ends the initial value changing process as it is, and proceeds to step S155.

  By executing the random number circuit setting process, various signals are input to the random number circuit 503 when the timer interrupt process including the game control process is performed, and various signals are generated in the random number circuit 503. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random number circuit 503 and the timing at which each signal is generated in the random number circuit 503.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the clock circuit 501 increases the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at predetermined intervals (timing T11, T21,... Shown in FIG. 50). A reference clock signal CLK (see FIG. 50A) is input to 503.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK supplied from the clock circuit 501 to generate a random number generation clock signal SI1 (see FIG. 50B). For example, the clock signal output circuit 524 raises the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at timings T11, T12,..., And changes the signal level from the high level to the low level at timings T21, T22,. To output a random number generating clock signal SI1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, for ease of explanation, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK by two to generate the random number generation clock signal SI1. However, in the actual random number circuit, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is from “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”. Therefore, in an actual random number circuit, the clock signal output circuit 524 is set in the cycle setting register 537 in a range from “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 256”. The reference clock signal CLK is divided by a division ratio corresponding to the cycle setting data “07h” to “FFh” to generate a random number generating clock signal SI1. The random number generating clock signal SI 1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532.

  In this embodiment, since the second random number update method is set in the random number circuit setting process, the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 to the selector 528. When the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 selects the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs it to the counter 521. . Each time the rising edge of the random number generating clock signal SI1 supplied from the selector 528 is input, the counter 521 updates the count value C and outputs it to the count value permutation changing circuit 523.

  The inversion circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 (see FIG. 50C) by inverting the signal level of the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. For example, the inverting circuit 532 lowers the signal level of the output terminal from the high level to the low level at timings T11, T12,. As a result, the inverted clock signal SI2 is output. Further, the inverted clock signal SI <b> 2 generated by the inverting circuit 532 is output to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 milliseconds) elapses after the winning detection signal SS (see FIG. 50D) is input to the timer circuit 534, the latch signal generation circuit 533 receives a disturbance from the random value read signal output circuit 526. A numerical reading signal is input. For example, when the signal level of the output terminal of the random number read signal output circuit 526 rises from a low level to a high level, the random value read signal is input to the latch signal generation circuit 533. The latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal input from the random value read signal output circuit 526 in response to the input of the second random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. A latch signal SL (see FIG. 50E) is output in synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 supplied from 532.

  As described above, the random number circuit 503 updates the count value C at the timings T11, T12, T13..., And outputs the latch signal SL at the timing T22 different from the timings T11, T12, T13. The random number value is stored in 531.

  Next, the serial communication circuit setting process (step S15a) in the main process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the serial communication circuit setting process. In the serial communication circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the serial communication circuit setting program 556 to set the baud rate of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1511). In this case, the CPU 56 writes a setting value corresponding to the baud rate to be set in the baud rate register 702 of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying a set value set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 writes the setting value in the baud rate register 702 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. For example, when the baud rate set value “156” is set by the CPU 56, the baud rate “1201.92 bps” is generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703 using the equation (1) and the clock frequency “3 MHz”.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a data format of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1512). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the data length (8 bits or 9 bits) of the transmission / reception data and the use / nonuse of the parity function by setting the value of each bit of the control register A707. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying the value of each bit of the control register A707 set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the game machine) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Yes. Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of each bit of the control register A707 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets whether to permit each interrupt request generated by the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1513). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the value of bits 5, 6, and 7 of the control register B708 to thereby send an interrupt request at the time of transmission (a transmission interrupt request that is an interrupt request when transmitting data, or a transmission completion interrupt that is performed when transmission is completed). Request) and whether or not to accept interrupt request at reception. The CPU 56 can also be set to allow both a transmission interrupt request and a reception interrupt request, and allows only one of a transmission interrupt request and a reception interrupt request. It is also possible to set. Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to permit an interrupt request at the time of each communication error by setting the values of the bits 0 to 3 of the control register C709. For example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 stores, in advance, a predetermined storage area in the ROM 54 for specifying information for specifying the value of each bit of the control register B 708 and the control register C 709 set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of each bit of the control register B 708 and the control register C 709 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically during a period when interrupts are permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Subsequently, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the switch circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch) Process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the initial value is set to be updated when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see step S157), and the counter of the random number circuit 503 is checked. Processing for updating the initial value input to 521 is performed (random circuit initial value updating processing: step S22). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S23).

  When the random number circuit initial value update process and the display random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 performs a count value permutation change process in which the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the permutation of count values output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 ( Step S24). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the count value permutation change process is determined depending on whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 of the random number circuit setting process. Then, the CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change process based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S25). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S26). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting an effect control command related to the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 and sending the effect control command (decorative symbol command control process: step S27). Note that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like (step S29). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. Execute the process for The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S30). In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S31). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S32: output process). Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S33) and ends the process.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting.

  Also, for example, in the timer interrupt process, only the switch process (see step S21), the decorative symbol command control process (see step S27), and the interrupt count process (described later in steps S321a and S322) are included in the game control process. It may be executed, and other processes in the game control process may be executed in the main process. In this case, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 includes steps S22 to S27 (excluding the interrupt count processing) and steps in the game control process in the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process. Processing from S29 to step S33 (excluding step S31) is executed. Further, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 counts the number of interruptions (the number of times the timer interruption process is executed after detecting the winning detection signal) in the timer interruption process (see step S321a). When it is detected that the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) (see step S322), a condition for reading a random number value from the random number circuit 503 is satisfied (the execution condition for variable display is satisfied). ) And a random number read flag indicating that the random number read condition is satisfied is set. Whether the random number read flag is set when the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes the start port switch passage process (see step S312) in the special symbol process (see step S25) in the main process. If it is determined that the random number read flag is set, an output control signal SC is output to the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (see step S323), and the random value storage circuit 531 receives the random number value. The stored random R value is read (see step S324). Then, in the main process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to make a big hit based on the read random number value when executing the special symbol normal process (see step S300) in the special symbol process (see step S25). It will be.

  Further, for example, in the timer interrupt process, only the switch process (see step S21) of the game control process is executed, and other processes including the decorative symbol command control process (see step S27) are executed in the main process. It may be. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 executes a switch process including an interrupt count process (see steps S321a and S322) in the timer interrupt process. For example, in the switch process, the CPU 56 determines the state of each switch 32a, 14a, 23, 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and counts the number of interrupts (see step S321a), and then performs timer interrupt process. It is confirmed whether or not the number of executions reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times). When the CPU 56 detects that the number of executions has reached a predetermined number (see step S322), the CPU 56 determines that the condition for reading the random number value from the random number circuit 503 is satisfied (the execution condition for variable display is satisfied), and A random number reading flag indicating that the numerical value reading condition is satisfied is set.

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S21 to S33 (excluding steps S28 and S31) corresponds to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Next, the random number circuit initial value update process (step S22) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a random number circuit initial value update process. In the random number circuit initial value update process, the CPU 56 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S220). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial value update flag is set (step S221). That is, in the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the setting for updating the initial value is made when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (see step S157).

  When the initial value update flag is set, the CPU 56 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. When the initial value update flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial value change flag is set (step S222). That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the initial value of the count value is currently changed (that is, whether or not it is changed to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560).

  When the initial value change flag is set (that is, when the initial value is currently changed based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560), the CPU 56 uses the initial value input to the counter 521 as the game control. The value based on the ID number of the microcomputer 560 is returned to the original value (for example, “1”) (step S223). Then, the CPU 56 resets the initial value change flag (step S224) and ends the initial value update process.

  If the initial value change flag is not set (that is, the initial value is not currently changed), the CPU 56 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. (Step S225). In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the initial value input to the counter 521 is calculated by adding a predetermined value “100” to the ID number “100”. Change to the value “200”. Further, for example, the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100”. Then, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag (step S226) and ends the initial value update process.

  When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, in step S225, the CPU 56 sets the random number read from one random number circuit (for example, the 12-bit random number circuit 503a) as a predetermined value as an ID number. The initial value input to the counter 521 may be obtained. Then, the CPU 56 may use a random number read from the other one (for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 503b) as a random number for determining the big hit.

  When the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S225, the CPU 56 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and the value set based on the ID number is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the maximum random number. If the CPU 56 determines that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the CPU 56 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521 with a predetermined value (for example, updates with the predetermined value “0”). do not do). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If it is determined in step S220 that the notification signal is in the OFF state, or if it is determined in step S221 that the initial value update flag is not set, the CPU 56 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521. Then, the random number circuit initial value update process is finished as it is, and the routine goes to Step S23.

  Next, the count value permutation change process (step S24) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the count value permutation changing process. The CPU 56 performs a count value permutation change process by executing a process according to the count value permutation change program 554. In the count value permutation change process, the CPU 56 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S241). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set (step S242). That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the setting for changing the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value has been made in the random number circuit setting process (see step S158). Check.

  When the count value permutation change flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 is changed when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Then, the CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536 (step S243). That is, the CPU 56 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of the count values C input to the random value storage circuit 531 by writing the count value permutation change data “01h”.

  As described above, in the count value permutation changing process, when the random number is updated to a predetermined final value, the permutation of the count value updated by the counter 521 is changed, so that the randomness generated by the random number circuit 503 is more random. Can be improved.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S25) in the main process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. When the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 performs the special symbol process, the variation shortening timer subtraction process (step S310) is performed, and the game ball is won in the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6. If the start opening switch 14a for detecting the game is turned on, that is, if the game ball has won the start winning opening 14 and the winning detection signal SS is input from the start opening switch 14a (step S311), the start opening switch passes. After performing the process (step S312), any one of steps S300 to S308 is performed according to the internal state. The variation shortening timer is a timer for setting the variation time when the variation time of the special symbol is shortened.

  If the start port switch 14a has not been turned on in step S311, the CPU 56 clears an interrupt counter, which will be described later, and then performs any one of steps S300 to S308 according to the internal state. I do.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): A state where variable symbol special display can be started (for example, the symbol variation has not been made in the special symbol display 8, and the previous symbol variation in the special symbol display 8 has ended) Waits for a predetermined period of time to elapse, and not a big hit game). When the special symbol variable display can be started, the start winning memory number for the special symbol is confirmed. If the start winning memorization number is not 0, it is determined whether or not the result of variable symbol special display is a big hit based on the random R generated by the random number circuit 503 stored in the special figure holding memory 570. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S301.

  Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301): A stop symbol after variable display of the special symbol is determined. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S302.

  Variation time setting process (step S302): A variation pattern is determined, and variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: time from when variable display is started until display result is derived display (stop display)) is a special symbol It is determined to be a variable display variable time. In addition, a variation time timer that measures the variation time of the determined special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S303.

  Special symbol variation process (step S303): When a predetermined time (the time indicated by the variation time timer in step S302) elapses, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): A decorative symbol stop command for instructing stop of the decorative symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Moreover, the special symbol in the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S305. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300. Note that a configuration in which a decorative symbol stop command is not transmitted may be employed. In this case, the effect control board 80 sets the change time in the change time timer based on the change pattern command from the main board 31 and updates the change time timer to uniquely change the change time of the decorative pattern. What is necessary is just to perform the process which stops the decorative design when it monitors and it determines with the fluctuation | variation time having passed.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): Control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening) and a flag (a flag used when detecting winning in the prize opening) are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven. Open the big prize opening. Also, the process timer sets the execution time of the big prize opening opening process and sets the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S306.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S306): control for sending a presentation control command for round display of the special prize opening to the production control board 80 and closing conditions for the special prize opening (for example, a predetermined number (for example, 10 for the special prize opening) ) To confirm that the game ball has won a prize). When the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied, the internal state is updated to shift to step S307.

  Specific area valid time process (step S307): A process of confirming that the big hit gaming state continuation condition is satisfied is performed. If the condition for continuing the big hit gaming state is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state is updated to shift to step S305. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state is updated to shift to step S308. In the case where the V winning area is provided, the presence / absence of the V winning switch is monitored and processing for confirming that the big hit gaming state continuation condition is satisfied is performed.

  Big hit end processing (step S308): Control for causing the effect control means to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state is updated so as to shift to step S300.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process (step S312). In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start winning memory number indicated by the start winning counter (or the start winning memory number stored in the special figure holding memory 570) to 4 which is the maximum value. It is confirmed whether it has reached (step S321). If the start winning memorized number has not reached 4, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed (step S321a). That is, the CPU 56 executes a process of counting the number of times that the timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, by executing step S321a, the CPU 56 counts up an interrupt number counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed. When the value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the number of executions of the timer interrupt process indicated by the interrupt execution counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) (step S322). ). Then, after the game ball has won the start winning opening 14, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the interrupt execution counter has reached a predetermined number. When it is detected that the game ball has won the start winning opening 14 (that is, when YES is determined in step S322), the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution counter.

  The value set in advance as the predetermined number of times in step S322 is determined as follows. As described above, the timer circuit 534 of the random number circuit 503 measures the time that the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a, and detects that the measurement time has reached a predetermined period, Write numerical value capture data “01h”. In this embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) measured by the timer circuit 534 is a period in which a predetermined number of timer interrupt processes are executed (for example, when the timer interrupt process for every 2 ms is executed three times). The predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) used in step S322 is set so as to be shorter than 6 ms. By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the random number value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. It is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the circuit 531 from being read again. The timer circuit 534 does not measure the input time of the winning detection signal SS, but the CPU 56 measures the input time of the winning detection signal SS and writes the random number value fetch data “01h” into the random value fetch register 539. May be.

  When the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number, the CPU 56 can output the output control signal SC to the random number storage circuit 531 of the specified random number circuit 503 and read the random number storage circuit 531 (enable). The state is controlled (step S323).

  The CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (step S324). Further, the CPU 56 stores the read random R value in the storage area (special symbol determination buffer (special symbol holding memory 570)) corresponding to the value of the start winning memorized number (step S325). Further, when the random value R is stored in the buffer area, the CPU 56 stops outputting the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 and controls the random value storage circuit 531 to be in a non-readable (disabled) state (step). S326). In addition, the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution number counter (step S327). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of the random R stored in the predetermined buffer area to the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation memory 570 (step S328), and adds 1 to the count number of the start winning counter, thereby storing the start winning memory. The number is incremented by 1 (step S329).

  If the start prize is stored in step S321 but the maximum value of 4 has been reached, and if the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has not reached the predetermined number in step S322, the start port switch passing process is terminated.

  As described above, the timer interrupt process has been executed a predetermined number of times when reading the random R from the random value storage circuit 531 in the starting port switch passing process (that is, continued while the timer interrupt process is executed a predetermined number of times). The random number is read from the random value storage circuit 531 on the condition that the winning detection signal SS is input). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Further, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number value storage circuit 531 from being read again.

  Next, the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300). (Step S380), the random R value stored in correspondence with the holding number “1” is read from the special figure holding memory 570 (step S381). In this case, the CPU 56 decrements the count of the start winning counter by 1 to reduce the number of reserved memories by 1, and the second to fourth entries of the special figure reservation memory 570 (hold numbers “2” to “4”). The value of random R stored in is shifted upward by one entry (step S382).

  Further, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S383). That is, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is controlled to the certain change state. When the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a normal state other than the probability variation state, and is a table used for determining whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. The normal big hit determination table 571a (see FIG. 40A) is set (step S384). Further, when the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a probability change state, and as a table used to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. A probability change big hit determination table 571b (see FIG. 40B) is set (step S385).

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a big hit symbol based on the random R value stored in the predetermined buffer area in the start port switch passing process (step S386). In this case, the CPU 56 uses the normal-time big hit determination table 571a set in step S384 or the probability change big hit determination table 571b set in step S385 to determine whether or not to win.

  If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol, the CPU 56 turns on a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot state (step S387). If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is not to be a big hit symbol, the CPU 56 turns off the big hit flag (step S388). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S389).

  Next, payout control signals and payout control commands transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control means to the payout control means. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 58, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 31 rises (when the game control means starts the game control process), and indicates that the main board 31 has risen with respect to the payout control board 37. This is a signal for notification (connection confirmation signal for the main board 31). The connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning ball can be paid out.

  Similarly to the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 370 includes a serial communication circuit 380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control means and the payout control means. In this embodiment, various control commands are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to the payout control and the like.

  The award ball number command is a command that is output to designate the number of game balls (0 to 15) for which a payout request is made. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by any of the prize port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a, seven balls are detected. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, a prize ball number command “04” for notifying the number of prize balls of 4 is transmitted, and any of the prize port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a is transmitted. When a game ball is detected, a prize ball number command “07” for notifying the number of prize balls 7 is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls 15 is notified. The award ball number command “0F” is transmitted. The award ball number command may be composed of 2 bytes. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 first writes the lower 1 byte data of the prize ball number command to the transmission data register 710. When the transmission of the lower 1 byte data of the prize ball number command from the transmission shift register 712 is completed, the CPU 56 responds to the transmission interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505, and the CPU 56 receives the upper 1 byte of the prize ball number command. Data is written to the transmission data register 710, and the upper byte data of the prize ball number command is transmitted from the transmission shift register 712.

  The prize ball ACK command “D2” is a command for notifying the game control means that the payout control means has received the prize ball number command. The prize ball ACK command corresponds to a reception confirmation signal indicating that a prize ball number command has been received.

  60 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the control signal shown in FIG. 58 and the control command shown in FIG. FIG. 60 also shows a power-off signal. As shown in FIG. 60, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. The power-off signal is output via the output circuit 373B and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68. The award ball number command is output from the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and input to the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. The award ACK command is output from the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 and input to the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  Each of the connection confirmation signal and the power-off signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line. Also, between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37, the signal line for the power-off signal to the game control microcomputer 560 and the signal line for the control signal (connection confirmation signal) related to the payout control are wired together. can do. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the wiring space related to the power-off signal to the gaming control microcomputer 560 can be saved.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 serially transmits a prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 sends a prize ball ACK command to the game control microcomputer 560. Although the case of performing bidirectional communication for serial transmission will be described, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 may perform one-way serial communication. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may perform one-way serial communication in which a prize ball number command is sent to the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 may not send a prize ball ACK command. .

  FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout control signal and a payout control command. As shown in FIG. 61, when the winning detection switch detects a winning of a game ball, the game control means (game controlling microcomputer 560) pays out a winning ball number command corresponding to the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning. This is transmitted to the control means (dispensing control microcomputer 370). Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine by a detection signal of the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the content of the total number of winning balls stored in the backup RAM. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, a winning ball number command corresponding to the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with winning is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by any of the prize port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a. Seven prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the number of prize balls is four when the number of prize balls is four according to the number of prize balls to be paid out. When the number of prize balls is 7, a prize ball number command “07” indicating that the number of prize balls is 7, and the number of prize balls is 15 when the number of prize balls is 15. A prize ball number command “0F” indicating 15 is transmitted.

  When the transmission of the winning ball number command is completed, the serial communication circuit 505 of the game control microcomputer 560 makes an interrupt request during transmission to the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. Due to the transmission interrupt request, the CPU 56 recognizes that the transmission of the award ball number command has been completed, and waits for a reception confirmation signal from the payout control microcomputer.

  When the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms reception of the prize ball number command, it stores the number of prize balls indicated in the received prize ball number command in the reception buffer of the payout control microcomputer 370. Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 adds the number of prize balls to a prize ball non-payout number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball ACK command “D2” to the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 may store the number of prize balls in the reception counter in the interrupt process based on the interrupt request upon reception from the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, when the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number command, it makes an interrupt request upon reception to the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370. Then, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 stores the prize ball number in the reception buffer by executing an interrupt process in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380.

  When a prize ball ACK command is received and the prize data ACK command is stored in the reception data register 711, the serial communication circuit 505 of the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. A reception interrupt request is made to the CPU 56 of 560. The CPU 56 recognizes that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the data by executing the interrupt process by the interrupt request at the time of reception, and receives a prize ball ACK command from the reception data register 711 in the prize ball ACK wait process described later. Read.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S1201) and a prize ball control process (step S1202). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 are output to port 0 (step S1203). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 during the interrupt enabled state, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes the serial communication circuit 505 to generate an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause of the interrupt. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of interrupt processing that the serial communication circuit 505 performs in response to an interrupt request. FIG. 63A shows a communication error interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 when the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request with a communication error as an interrupt cause. FIG. 63B shows a reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 when an interrupt request is issued with the cause of the interruption that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data. FIG. 63 (c) shows a transmission completion interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 when an interrupt request is issued with the interruption caused by the serial communication circuit 505 completing transmission of transmission data.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 gives priority to an interrupt process that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 based on the fact that the communication error interrupt priority execution flag is set. And execute.

  When there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 checks each bit of the status register A 705 of the serial communication circuit 505 to identify the cause of the interrupt. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 gives priority to an interrupt process that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 based on the fact that the communication error interrupt priority execution flag is set. And execute.

  The CPU 56 preferentially checks bit 0 to bit 3 of the status register A705 based on the fact that the communication error interrupt priority execution flag is set, and identifies the cause of the interrupt. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether another interrupt cause (reception of received data has been received) as to whether or not an interrupt request has occurred due to the occurrence of a communication error (overrun, noise error, framing error or parity error) in the serial communication circuit 505. Or, determination is performed with priority over transmission data transmission completion). If the CPU 56 determines that one or more of the bits 0 to 3 of the status register A 705 is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. To do.

  If it is determined that the interrupt cause is that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 changes the communication error interrupt processing shown in FIG. 63A to another interrupt processing (FIG. 63B and FIG. 63). It is executed with priority over the interrupt processing shown in (c). In this case, the CPU 56 sets a communication error flag indicating that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S41).

  In this embodiment, a case will be described in which communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 is prohibited in a prize ball control process to be described later based on the setting of the communication error flag. In other words, communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 may be prohibited during the processing of step S41. In this case, in the communication error interrupt process, the CPU 56 prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, for example, by stopping the function of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. To control. For example, the CPU 56 prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by setting bit 3 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and not using the transmission circuit. Further, in the communication error interrupt process, the CPU 56 controls the reception of data from the payout control board 37 by prohibiting the function of the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505, for example. For example, the CPU 56 sets the bit 2 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and sets the reception circuit not to be used, so that the payout control microcomputer 37 mounted on the payout control board 37 Data reception is prohibited.

  When a communication error is detected, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (communication error display command) for designating communication error occurrence display to notify the effect control means that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. Perform the process. When receiving the communication error display command, the effect control CPU performs an effect using sound, display, light emitter, etc., and notifies that a communication error has occurred.

  If the cause of the interruption is not the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 checks bit 5 of the status register A. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data. When determining that the bit 5 of the status register A is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the reception data.

  If it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data, the CPU 56 executes a reception interrupt process shown in FIG. In this case, the CPU 56 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 505 is receiving reception data (step S42).

  In step S42, the CPU 56 may set a reception interrupt flag and read data from the reception data register 711 of the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball ACK command. If it is determined that the prize ball ACK command is received, the CPU 56 sets a prize ball ACK reception flag indicating that the prize ball ACK command has been received.

  In addition, when the cause of the interruption is not that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 and that the serial communication circuit 505 has not received the received data, the CPU 56 checks bit 6 of the status register A. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data. When determining that the bit 6 of the status register A is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data.

  If it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data, the CPU 56 executes transmission completion interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this case, the CPU 56 sets a transmission interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data (step S43).

  By executing the processing described above, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 identifies an interrupt cause when an interrupt request is received from the serial communication circuit 505, and a flag corresponding to the identified interrupt cause. (Communication error flag, reception interrupt flag or transmission interrupt flag) is set. When the flag is set according to the specified interrupt cause, the CPU 56 recognizes that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, that data has been received, or that data transmission has been completed.

  The payout control CPU 371 installed in the payout control microcomputer 370 also specifies the interrupt cause according to the same process as the process shown in FIG. 63 when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380. Set the flag according to the interrupt cause.

  For example, consider a case where a prize ball number command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 by one-way communication. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to generate a timer interrupt to the payout control microcomputer 370, for example, every 2 ms. After the prize ball number command is transmitted, the next interrupt process is performed. Assume that the award ball number command is transmitted again after 2 ms. The payout control microcomputer 370 is configured to generate a timer interrupt every 4 ms, for example, and can receive a prize ball number command every 4 ms. Then, even though the game control microcomputer 560 has not read the first prize ball number command transmitted, the payout control microcomputer 370 may receive the next prize ball number command. If the payout control CPU 371 is set to receive a prize ball number command in response to a reception interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380, the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 560 can be reliably received. it can.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 64 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “6”) is set in the first address of the winning ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer (the one corresponding to input port 0 of the 2-byte switch-on buffer) The switch input bit determination value and the number of winning balls for each switch of the winning opening that will pay out the winning ball by winning are sequentially set corresponding to each of the switches of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to a bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input. The upper address of the switch-on buffer is a fixed value (for example, 7F (H)). In the prize ball number table, the same data is set in each of the lower addresses of the six switch-on buffers. In this embodiment, the addresses of the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are designated by 16 bits.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process. In the winning ball number adding process, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the winning ball number table in the pointer (step S1211). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S1212). Next, the upper address (8 bits) of the switch-on buffer is set in the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte check pointer (step S1213).

  Then, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1214), the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the lower address of the switch-on buffer) is set in the lower 1 byte of the check pointer (step S1215), The pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S1216). Next, the address data pointed to by the check pointer, that is, the contents of the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S1217). ) And the logical product (step S1218). As a result, 7 bits other than the bit corresponding to the detection signal of the switch to be inspected become 0 in the register loaded with the contents of the switch-on buffer. Then, the pointer value is increased by 1 (step S1219).

  If the calculation result in step S1218 is 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of prize balls) is the prize ball addition value. (Steps S1220 and S1221), and the prize-ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize-ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1222). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S1223 and 1224).

  In step S1225, the number of processes is reduced by 1. If the number of processes is 0, the process ends. If the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S1214 (step S1226). In step S1220, when it is confirmed that the calculation result in step S1218 is 0, that is, the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is in an OFF state, the process proceeds to step S1225.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control processing in step S1202. In the prize ball control process, after executing the prize ball abnormality detection process in step S1230, the CPU 56 executes any one of steps S1231 to S1235 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission waiting process (step S1231) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the award ball transmission waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set (step S1241). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S1242). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the prize ball process code value is set to 1 (step S1243), and the process ends.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number command transmission process (step S1232) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. The CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set in the prize ball transmission process (step S1251). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 prohibits communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 and ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, the CPU 56 controls the data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 by, for example, stopping the function of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the CPU 56 prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by setting bit 3 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and not using the transmission circuit. Note that, for example, the CPU 56 sets bit 3 of the control register B 708 to “0” in the communication error interrupt process shown in FIG. 63A, and prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370. Good.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S1252). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S1253). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the maximum value of the prize ball command, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S1254).

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 writes the contents of the prize ball number buffer as a prize ball number command in the transmission data register 710 of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1255), sets the value of the prize ball process code to 2 (step S1256), and performs processing. Exit. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the prize ball command is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number command for designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is written in the transmission data register 710. Thereafter, the award ball number command written in the transmission data register 710 is transferred to the transmission shift register 712 and transmitted from the transmission shift register 712 to the payout control microcomputer.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission completion waiting process (step S1233) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In the award ball transmission completion waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set (step S1261). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the transmission interrupt flag is set (step S1262). If the transmission interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to the process of step S1263. If the transmission interrupt flag is not set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the serial communication circuit 505 has already completed transmission of the prize ball number command written in the transmission data register 710 in the prize ball number command transmission process, and has completed transmission of the prize ball number command. If this is confirmed, the process after step S1263 is performed.

  If the transmission interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the transmission interrupt flag (step S1263). Then, the CPU 56 subtracts the contents of the prize ball number buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means) from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S1264). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may subtract the number of prize balls to be paid out from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer before writing the prize ball number command to the transmission data register 710 in step S1255.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an ACK reception completion determination time value in the prize ball timer (step S1266). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S1267), and the process is terminated. The ACK reception completion determination time value is a time value for monitoring whether or not a prize ball ACK command is received from the payout control means.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a prize ACK waiting process (step S1234) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 3. In the award ball ACK waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set (step S1271). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 prohibits communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 and ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, the CPU 56 controls the reception of data from the payout control board 37 by prohibiting the function of the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505, for example. For example, the CPU 56 sets the bit 2 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and sets the reception circuit not to be used, so that the payout control microcomputer 37 mounted on the payout control board 37 Data reception is prohibited. For example, the CPU 56 may set bit 2 of the control register B 708 to “0” in the communication error interrupt processing shown in FIG. 63A, and prohibit data reception from the payout control microcomputer 370. Good.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reception interrupt flag is set (step S1272). That is, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the serial communication circuit 505 receives the received data and the received data register 711 stores the data. If the reception interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to the process of step S1273. On the other hand, if the reception interrupt flag is not set, the CPU 56 proceeds to the process of step S1275.

  If the reception interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 reads data from the reception data register 711 of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1273). Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read data is a prize ball ACK command (whether or not it is a command “D2”) (step S1274).

  In the reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the reception interrupt flag is set and the reception data has already been read from the reception data register 711, the CPU 56 determines the prize ball in steps S1273 and S1274. It may be determined whether or not an ACK reception flag is set. When the prize ball ACK reception flag is set, the CPU 56 may determine that the prize ball ACK command has been received.

  If the reception interrupt flag is not set in step S1272, or if the data read in step S1274 is not a prize ball ACK command, the CPU 56 still receives a prize ball ACK command from the payout control microcomputer 370. Judge that it is not in the state. In this case, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the prize ball timer by 1 (step S1275), and ends the process if the value is not 0 (step S1276). When the value of the prize ball timer reaches 0, it is determined that the payout control microcomputer 370 has not transmitted the prize ball ACK command, a retransmission flag is set (step S1277), and the value of the prize ball process code is set to 4. (Step S1278), and the process ends. When the value of the prize ball process code becomes 4, the prize ball re-transmission process (step S1235) is executed. When the retransmission flag is set, a payout abnormality notification start command is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in the prize ball abnormality detection process (step S1230).

  In step S1274, when confirming that the data read from the reception data register 711 is a prize ball ACK command, the CPU 56 resets the reception interrupt flag (step S1279), and sets the value of the prize ball process code to 0. (Step S1280). If the retransmission flag is set because the communication is normally completed, the retransmission flag is reset (steps S1281 and S1282).

  Through the above processing, the game control means stores the total number of game balls as prize balls to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition in the total prize ball number storage buffer so as to be specified. The game control means also issues a payout command command (award ball number command) for designating a payout number of a predetermined number of prize balls to the payout control means based on the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Send. Here, the predetermined number is 15 if the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer is 15 or more, and is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer if it is less than 15. The number of prize balls. Then, when a prize ball number command designating the prize ball payout is transmitted, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the payout number designated by the prize ball number command from the prize ball number stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Since the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball ACK command immediately after receiving the prize ball number command, communication regarding the prize ball number command can be completed regardless of the prize ball payout from the ball payout device 97. The control microcomputer 560 can continuously transmit the next award ball number command before the payout of the number of payouts designated by the award ball number command is completed.

  In this embodiment, in order to store the total number of premium game media to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout conditions in an identifiable manner, the total prize ball number storage buffer for storing the total number itself is used as an example. The number of winnings in each winning area is stored, or the number of winnings for each winning area having the same number of winning balls (for example, winning mouth 14 corresponding to 4 winning balls, winning corresponding to 7 winning balls) It is possible to use a buffer or the like for storing the number of winnings in the big winning opening corresponding to the number of mouths 33, 39, 29, 30 and 15 and the number of winnings not yet finished). Good. In that case, a prize ball number command in which a number corresponding to the number of prize balls for each winning area is set is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370. Further, instead of transmitting a winning ball number command indicating the number of winning balls, a game command microcomputer 560 transmits a payout command command indicating that there has been a winning or a winning number to the payout control microcomputer 370. It may be.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a prize ball re-transmission process (step S1235) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 4. The CPU 56 checks whether or not the communication error flag is set in the winning ball re-transmission process (step S1291). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 prohibits communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 and ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by stopping the function of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the CPU 56 prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by setting bit 3 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and not using the transmission circuit.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 rewrites the contents of the prize ball number buffer in the transmission data register 710 of the serial communication circuit 505 as a prize ball number command (step S1292). Further, the CPU 56 sets the ACK reception completion determination time value again in the prize ball timer (step S1293). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S1294), and the process ends.

  Since the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3, the prize ball ACK waiting process is executed again. In the award ball ACK waiting process to be executed again, if it is not detected that the award ball ACK command has been received again, specifically, if the award ball timer times out in step S1276, the award ball again A retransmission process is executed. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 560 cannot receive the winning ball ACK command as the reception confirmation signal indicating that the payout amount data has been received, the winning ball number command is received until the winning ball ACK command can be received. Repeat retransmissions.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the prize ball abnormality detection process in step S230. In the prize ball abnormality detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the re-transmission flag has changed from the reset state to the set state, the CPU 56 uses the payout abnormality notification start command as an effect control command (specifically, the effect control board 80). Transmission control is performed (to the control microcomputer 100) (steps S1301 and S1302). The CPU 56 does not transmit the payout abnormality notification start command after executing the prize ball retransmitting process, but transmits the payout abnormality notification start command to the effect control board 80 and then executes the prize ball retransmitting process. It may be.

  When transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM 54) according to the type of the effect control command as a pointer. To do. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S27).

  Further, the CPU 56 detects that the re-transmission flag is changed from the set state to the reset state (therefore, it is detected only when the reset state is first set when the set state continues). Then, control is performed to transmit a payout abnormality notification end command to the effect control board 80 (specifically, to the effect control microcomputer 100) (steps S1303 and S1304).

  In this embodiment, when the retransmission flag is reset, the CPU 56 transmits a payout abnormality notification end command in step S1304, but may be configured not to transmit it. In this case, the burden on the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced. In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to terminate the payout abnormality notification independently after a predetermined time, for example.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370) will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 73, the output port 0 is an output port for outputting a signal of each phase supplied to the dispensing motor 289 by the stepping motor. Further, the output port 1 is an output port for outputting a ball-out LED 52, a prize ball LED 51, a prize ball signal, prize ball information, ball rental information, and a gaming machine error status signal output to the outside of the gaming machine. is there. The output port 2 is an output port for outputting each segment of the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED.

  Although not shown in FIG. 73, the payout control board 37 is also provided with an output port 3 for outputting an EXS signal and a PRDY signal to the card unit 50.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 74, a connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 is input to the bit 4. In addition, the detection signals of the ball break switch 187 and the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 are input to the bits 6 and 7, respectively. In addition, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301, the operation signal from the error release switch 375, and the detection signal of the full switch 48 are input to bits 1 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 4 to 6 of the input port 1, respectively. The input port 2 receives an output signal of the clear switch 921 from the power supply board 910 (clear signal: shown as “clear switch” in FIG. 31) and a power-off signal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control means. In the main process, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S701). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S702), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S703). The payout control CPU 371 sets the internal device register (step S704), sets the CTC and PIO (step S705), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S706). Further, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S707).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Accordingly, in the built-in device register setting process in step S704 and the process in step S705, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and setting an interrupt vector. The register is set. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the ball payout device 97 in response to a command signal related to award ball payout from the main board, and a ball payout device 97 in response to a ball lending request. A process for driving the program may be included.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 370. Therefore, an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC can be used. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the state of the output signal of the clear switch 921 input via the input port 2 is confirmed only once (step S708). In the confirmation, when the on is detected, the payout control CPU 371 executes an initialization process (steps S712 to S715). If the clear switch 921 is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirmation is made (step S709). Whether or not the protection process has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process described later according to the execution of the data protection process in the backup RAM area (for example, It is confirmed by whether or not 2). Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that data protection processing has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in step S709. If it is confirmed that there is a backup, it may be determined that there is backup.

  If it is determined that there is a backup, the payout control CPU 371 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S710). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In this embodiment, in the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by a process similar to the above process, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S710, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, the payout control state restoration processing is not executed, and the initialization processing (steps S712 to S715) is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the payout control CPU 371 performs payout control state recovery processing. Specifically, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter formed in the backup RAM is set as the initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S711). And the process after step S712 is performed.

  In the initialization process, the payout control CPU 371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S712). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S713). The process of step S713 includes a process of setting an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter in the award ball unpaid number counter. Therefore, when the payout control state recovery process (step S711) is executed, the value of the unsold prize ball number counter stored in the backup RAM is set again in the unsold prize ball number counter. In other words, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter stored in the backup RAM is used as it is.

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 executes serial communication circuit setting processing for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S713a). In this case, the payout control CPU 371 causes the serial communication circuit 380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 560 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S15a) performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. Make settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380 (step S713b). In this case, in this case, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initial setting process (see step S15b) performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 370 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated (step S714). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since interruption is prohibited in step S701 of the initial setting process, interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S715). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 370 is set so as to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control means. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a power-off process for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output (step S749). Thereafter, a payout control process after step S751 is executed. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 first performs an input determination process (step S751). In the input determination process, the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 (see FIG. 74) are detected, and the detection result is a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). It is a process to reflect on. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked, but the input state is checked. Check the status of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S754). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S755). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control for paying out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50, and for performing a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S756).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S758). Further, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED 51 and the ball out LED 52 is executed (step S759).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, and a prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control processing in step S759, the payout control CPU 371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 based on the error bit being set. Also, the payout control CPU 371 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 51 when the prize ball is being paid out in the display control process. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 51 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and an information output process (step S758). And updated in the display control process (step S759).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the payout motor control process in step S753. In the payout motor control process, the payout control CPU 371 executes one of steps S521 to S526 in accordance with the value of the payout motor control code.

  In the payout motor normal process (step S521) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 0, the payout control CPU 371 sets the pointer at the head address of the table stored in the ROM. The payout motor normal process setting table stores a payout motor excitation pattern table in which data of excitation patterns (payout motors φ1 to φ4) of each step for rotating the payout motor 289 at the time of ball payout is sequentially set. Yes.

  In the payout motor start preparation process (step S522) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 1, the payout control CPU 371 sets bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0. Perform processing such as setting the initial value of the excitation pattern.

  In the payout motor slow-up process (step S523) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 2, the payout control CPU 371 starts the rotation of the payout motor 289 more smoothly than in the case of the constant speed process. Bit 4 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at a long interval and gradually approaching the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Set to ~ 7. At the time of reading, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at the address pointed to by the pointer are read and the value of the pointer is incremented by one.

  In the payout motor constant speed process (step S524) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 3, the payout control CPU 371 periodically reads the content of the payout motor excitation pattern table and outputs the output state of the output port 0. Are set in bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to.

  In the payout motor brake process (step S525) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 4, the payout control CPU 371 has a longer interval than in the case of the constant speed process in order to stop the payout motor 289 smoothly. In addition, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read at a time interval gradually moving away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing, and bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 Set to.

  In the ball biting payout motor brake process (step S526) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 5, the payout control CPU 371 smoothes the payout motor 289 in the case of rotation for releasing the ball biting. The payout motor excitation pattern is longer than the rotation of the payout motor 289 for releasing the ball biting, and gradually away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. The contents of the table are read and set in bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of output port 0.

  Next, an operation in which the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits and receives various commands in the main control communication process in step S755 will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, the payout control microcomputer 370 includes a serial communication circuit 380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 uses the serial communication circuit 380 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 59 from the game control microcomputer 560. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 370 uses the serial communication circuit 380 to transmit the prize ball ACK command “D2” shown in FIG. 59 as a reception confirmation signal.

  Similarly to the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560, when the payout control CPU 371 receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380 while it is in the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt that the serial communication circuit 380 has issued an interrupt request for. Performs interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 371 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 371 executes a reception interrupt process according to the same process as in FIG. . In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 380 is receiving reception data. The payout control CPU 371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 371 determines whether or not the received data read is a prize ball number command in the interruption process during reception. If the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set (steps S542 to S545 described later). (Refer to the above), it is not necessary to execute the process of adding the number of prize balls to the prize ball unpaid-out number counter (see step S546 described later).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing main control communication processing in which the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 communicates with the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) of the main board 31. In the main control communication process, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the connection confirmation signal is on (step S541). Note that the connection confirmation signal being in the on state means that power is supplied and the game control means can control the progress of the game, and that the connection confirmation signal is in the off state means This means that the supply stop process is started and the game control means cannot progress the game (the connection confirmation signal is turned off by the output port clear process in the power supply stop process).

  The payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the reception interrupt flag is set (step S542). That is, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the serial communication circuit 380 receives the received data and the data is stored in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  If the reception interrupt flag is set, the payout control CPU 371 reads data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S543). Also, the payout control CPU 371 determines whether or not the read data is a prize ball number command (whether it is any one of commands “04”, “07”, or “0F”) (step S544). .

  Upon confirming that the data read from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 380 is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 371 resets the reception interrupt flag (step S545), and the prize ball number command indicates The number of prize balls is added to the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S546). Then, the payout control CPU 371 writes the prize ball ACK command to the transmission data register 710 of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S547), and ends the process. Thereafter, the winning ball ACK command written in the transmission data register is transferred to the transmission shift register of the serial communication circuit 380, and is transmitted from the transmission shift register of the serial communication circuit 380 to the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the prize ball lending control processing in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control CPU 371 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (step S601). The value is decremented by 1 (steps S602 and S604), and if the ball is not being lent, the value of the unpaid prize ball counter is decreased by 1 (steps S602 and S603). Next, the payout ball detection bit of the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S605). The payout ball detection bit is a game regardless of whether the payout motor 289 is driven in one payout ball payout process (up to 15 balls) or one ball lending process (25 payouts) in the payout passing waiting process. This is used to detect that no sphere has passed through the payout number counting switch 301. Thereafter, any one of steps S610 to S612 is executed according to the value of the payout control code.

  In the winning ball lending control process, when checking the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 or subtracting the unpaid number counter, the error bit check is not executed. Therefore, even if an error state relating to the payout of game balls is detected, every time a payout of game balls is detected by the payout number count switch 301, if the payout game balls are loaned balls, a ball rental unpaid number counter 1 is subtracted, and if it is a prize ball, a process of subtracting 1 from the prize ball unpaid number counter is executed. Therefore, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of unpaid game balls can be managed accurately. That is, a game ball paid out from the ball payout device 97 before the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 detects the occurrence of an error is caused by the payout number count switch 301 with a slight delay from the time of payout. As detected, the payout control CPU 371 detects the occurrence of an error after the game ball is paid out from the ball payout device 97 and before the game ball is detected by the payout number count switch 301. In this case, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 97 before detecting the occurrence of the error can be reflected in the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a payout start waiting process (step S610) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 executes a process for paying out a prize ball after step S631 if the BRDY signal is not on (step S621). However, if the error bit is set, the processing after step S631 is not executed (step S622). The error bit in the error flag includes a main board non-connection error bit. The main board non-connection error is set when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 is in the OFF state. Accordingly, the payout control CPU 371 starts substantial control on condition that the connection confirmation signal is turned on after power supply to the gaming machine is started. The fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the on state means that power supply is performed and the game control means can control the progress of the game, so that the payout control of the prize ball according to the progress of the game can be executed. means. On the other hand, the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in an off state means that the power supply is stopped and the game control means cannot advance the game, so that the award ball payout control according to the progress of the game cannot be executed. It means that there is. Accordingly, the payout control CPU 371 stops payout control of the winning ball when the main board non-connection error bit is set. On the other hand, in this example, the lending ball payout control is executed without checking the error bit, and the lending control is continuously performed even if the main board unconnected error bit is set. .

  If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal that is a ball lending request signal is on (step S623), the payout control CPU 371 checks whether the VL signal is on. (Step S623a). If the VL signal is on, the payout control CPU 371 sets a ball lending operation in progress flag (step S624). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S625), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S626). If the VL signal is not on in step S623a, the payout control CPU 371 proceeds to step S622 without performing the processes in and after step S624.

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor start preparation process (step S522) as the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. ) Is set (step S627), the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S628), and the process is terminated.

  In step S631, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the award ball non-payout number counter is 0 (step S631). If 0, the process ends. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether it is 15 or more (step S632). If it is less than 15, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S633), and if it is 15 or more, “15” is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer. Then, a winning ball operating flag is set (step S635), and the process proceeds to step S627.

  As described above, in the payout start waiting process, when the VL signal is not on (see step S623a), the payout control CPU 371 does not shift to the process of steps S624 to S626 and pays out the game balls for lending. Control to prohibit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being performed when normal communication cannot be performed between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine.

  In addition, even when the VL signal is not in the on state, the payout control CPU 371 executes the processing of steps S632 to S627 when the prize ball unpaid number counter is not 0, and pays out a prize game ball. I do. Therefore, even when the communication state between the payout control microcomputer 370 and the game control microcomputer 560 is normal, it is possible to prevent a situation where the payout of the prize game balls is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the payout control by the payout control microcomputer 370 from being stopped more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, in the payout start waiting process shown in FIG. 80, it is first determined whether or not there is a ball lending request, and a process for lending a ball (see steps S623 to S626) is preferentially executed. Although the case has been described, first, the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter may be confirmed, and the process for paying out the prize balls (steps S631 to S635) may be preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the case where it is confirmed whether or not the error bit is set only before executing the process for paying out a prize ball (see step S622) is described. The error bit may be confirmed before executing (for example, before step S623).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S611) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S641). For example, the payout control CPU 371 sets a flag to that effect when the payout motor brake process (step S525) in the payout motor control process ends, and whether the payout operation is completed by checking the flag in step S641. You can check whether or not.

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control CPU 371 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S642). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S643), and the process ends.

  82 to 84 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S612) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball is tried up to 2 times. In the re-payout operation, when it is detected by the payout number count switch 301 that the game ball is actually paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, the maximum number of game balls to be paid out in one prize ball payout operation is 15, and if a prize ball number command is received during the prize ball payout, the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is received. Therefore, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, and if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball or the remaining number of ball lending (corresponding to the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter) Try. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 289 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, when the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S653 (step S650). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S651). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S652), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. Note that the process of step S650 is a process that takes into account when a game ball payout retry operation to be described later is started. When the process of step S807 described later is executed, a retry operation is started through a route that moves from step S650 to S653.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S652), it is confirmed whether or not the ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S653). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation bit in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (see steps S623 and S624). When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S654). ). When the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is determined that the winning ball payout process has been completed normally, and the payout ball detection bit in the payout control state flag, 1 bit during re-payout operation, and during re-payout operation 2 bits, the winning ball operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S655), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S656), and the process is terminated. This bit is set when the switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number counting switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. Further, 1 bit during the re-payout operation and 2 bits during the re-payout operation are control bits used when executing a re-payout process including two re-payout operations.

  The payout control CPU 371 determines that an error flag (specifically, a payout switch error error 1 bit, a payout switch error error 2 bit, and a payout case error bit) when the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0. The re-payout operation is executed on the condition that any one or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S659) and on the condition that the payout ball detection bit is not set (step S661). To do. If the error flag is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid prize ball number counter may not be 0. Therefore, if the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the prize ball payout process, it is assumed that the prize ball payout process is normally completed. The process proceeds to step S655. For example, when 15 game balls should be paid out in one prize ball payout process, when only 14 game balls are actually paid out (the number of payout count switch 301 is 14 game balls). In this case, the payout ball detection bit is set, so it is considered that the award ball payout process has been completed normally. It should not have been done, and the shortage will be paid out in the next prize ball payout process, so there will be no disadvantage to the player.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S662). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S663). If 1 bit is not set during the re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S664), and 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S665). ) The value of the re-payout operation number or the ball lending unpaid-out number counter is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S666). Further, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor activation preparation process (step S522) to the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. set. The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S666, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S666 is used in the re-payout process in the lend-out process. That is, in step S666, the payout control CPU 371 sets the re-payout operation number in the re-payout process in the prize ball payout process, and sets the value of the ball lending unpaid-out number counter in the re-payout process in the ball lending payout process. . Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S667), and the process is terminated.

  In step S663, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 sets 1 as the re-payout operation number in order to execute the second re-payout (step S668). Then, 1 bit during resetting operation is reset (step S669), and 2 bits during resetting operation are set (step S670). Then, control goes to a step S666.

  When it is confirmed in step S662 that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 does not pay out the game ball even if the re-payout process is executed twice (payout number count switch). 301 has not detected a game ball), a payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S672). At that time, 2 bits are reset during the re-payout operation (step S671). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if no game balls are paid out even if two re-payout operations are performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process), it is assumed that the game ball payout operation is defective and the payout number count switch is not A passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize game medium payout control means in the payout control microcomputer 370 does not pay out the prize game medium based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 as the payout detection means. When this is detected, control is performed so that the payout means pays out one prize game medium up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice). In this embodiment, if the prize game medium is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the prize game medium is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S672), the payout case error bit may be set when it is first detected that the premium game medium has not been paid out. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”) means that the actual number of payouts is equal to the number of game balls paid out in spite of execution of a normal payout process. This is an operation to be executed when the amount is small, and means an operation for executing the payout process again in order to pay out unpaid game balls separately from the normal payout process.

  In the winning ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one winning ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 81 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 82 and the like, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S659 or the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not a re-payout operation is to be performed. This is not to determine whether or not to start ball lending. Therefore, after the process of step S626, S633, or step S634 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bits in the error flag checked in step S621 include an error bit indicating that the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the connection confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when it is best to turn it off. If an error occurs even after the game ball payout process is started after the process of step S626, S633 or step S634 is performed, instead of continuing the game ball payout process until a good point is reached. The game ball payout process may be stopped immediately.

  Upon confirming that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed in step S653, the payout control CPU 371 confirms whether or not the value of the unlapped ball lending number counter is 0 (step S657). . If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process is normally completed, and the process proceeds to step S655.

  In step S657, if the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, any one of the payout switch error error 1 bit, the payout switch error error 2 bit, and the payout case error bit) Or one bit or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S675), the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S676). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S677). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S678), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S679). ) After further resetting the payout ball detection bit (step S680), the process proceeds to step S666.

  In step S677, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process for re-executing the re-payout operation. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S681). If the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the game ball is paid out in the first re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S683. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, the process proceeds to step S684 to execute the second re-payout operation.

  In step S683, the payout ball detection bit is reset, and then the process proceeds to step S666. Therefore, in this case, since 1 bit remains set during the re-payout operation, the first (first) re-payout operation is performed again. In step S684, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations (step S684), 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S685), and the process proceeds to step S666.

  In step S676, when it is confirmed that the 2 bits during re-payout operation are set, the payout control CPU 371 resets 2 bits during the re-payout operation (step S686), and if the payout ball detection bit is set, That is, if the game ball is paid out by the re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S683 to try to eliminate the remaining unpaid out. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not been paid out even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the payout number count switch 301 has not detected a game ball). A payout case error bit is set (step S688). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process) related to the ball lending process, a game ball payout operation is performed. As a failure, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Next, error processing will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of error and the display of the LED 374 for error display. As shown in FIG. 85, when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 is turned off, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 displays an error display LED 374 as a main board non-connection error. Control to display “1” is performed. Therefore, when the connection confirmation signal is turned off while the input state of the connection confirmation signal is being confirmed, “1” is displayed on the error display LED 374.

  When the disconnection of the payout count switch 301 or a ball clogging occurs at the payout count switch 301, the error display LED 374 is controlled to display “2” as the payout switch abnormality detection error 1. The disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or the occurrence of ball clogging in the payout number count switch 301 is determined by the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 not being turned off.

  When the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on even though the game ball is not paying out, a control for displaying “3” on the error display LED 374 as a payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is performed. Do. If the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 does not turn on despite the rotation abnormality of the payout motor 289 or the game ball being paid out, “4” is displayed on the error display LED 374 as a payout case error. Control. The specific method for detecting that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is not turned on is as described above.

  In addition, when the lower pan is full, that is, when the full switch 48 is turned on, control is performed to display “5” on the error display LED 374 as a full error. When the supply ball is insufficient, that is, when the ball break switch 187 is turned on, control is performed to display “6” on the error display LED 374 as a ball break error.

  Further, when the VL signal from the card unit 50 is turned off, control is performed to display “7” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit unconnected error. When communication with the card unit 50 is performed at an improper timing, control is performed to display “8” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit communication error. The prepaid card unit communication error is detected in the prepaid card unit control process (step S754).

  Among the above errors, after the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 or the payout case error occurs, when the error release switch 375 is operated and an operation signal is output from the error release switch 375 (when turned on), the payout control means Returns to the state before the error occurred.

  As described above, the payout control CPU 371 specifically displays an error on the error display LED 374 according to the relationship shown in FIG. 85 in the display control process of the timer interrupt process (see step S759). For example, the payout control CPU 371 indicates that a prepaid card unit unconnected error has occurred in the display control process based on the setting of the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit in an error process described later (see step S826). Is displayed on the error display LED 374. Further, for example, based on the fact that the full error bit is set in the error processing (see step S809), an error display “5” indicating that a full error has occurred in the display control processing is displayed on the error display LED 374. Control the display.

  86 and 87 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control CPU 371 checks the error flag, and the set bits are only the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 and the payout case error (only one of the two bits, or 2 It is confirmed whether or not (only bit) (step S801). If only those bits are set, it is confirmed whether or not the operation signal is turned on from the error release switch 375 (step S802). When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S803). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 375 is operated until the actual return from the error state to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 375 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S804). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S808. If the pre-error recovery timer is set, the value of the pre-error recovery timer is decremented by -1 (step S805). The bits of the abnormality detection error 2 and the payout case error are reset (step S807), and the process proceeds to step S808.

  When the processing of step S807 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not in the set state among the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 and payout case error bits. There is no problem with resetting. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error (see FIG. 85) that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 or the payout case error bit occurs, the error release switch 375 is pressed. The error is canceled.

  When the process of step S807 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control code is “2” (corresponding to the execution of the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 82 to 84), and the prize ball When the value of the unpaid-out number counter or the value of the ball-lending unpaid-out number counter is not 0, a retry operation for game ball payout is started. That is, when the award ball lending control process of step S756 is executed next, when the payout passing waiting process of step S612 is executed, the repayment process is performed again. For example, if a prize ball payout process has been performed and the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the process proceeds from step S654 to step S659, and it is confirmed in step S659 that the error bit is in a reset state. Therefore, the process for starting the re-payout process after step S662 is executed again, and the re-payout process is executed. Regarding the payout case error bit reset by pressing the error release switch 375, when the bit is set (when step S672 is executed), the payout control timer has already expired. Therefore, when the process in step S807 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control timer = 0 is determined in the determination in step S650 when the payout passage waiting process is executed next. Further, when the payout case error bit is set, the payout ball detection bit is 0 (since step S672 is not executed unless the payout ball detection bit is 0 according to the determination in step S661). Therefore, step S662 is always executed whenever it is confirmed in step S659 that the error bit is in the reset state. That is, the re-payout process is always executed.

  As described above, the payout control means is used to pay out a game ball when the payout number count switch 301 detects no game ball even though the ball payout device 97 pays out a game ball. After performing the correct payout control for causing the ball payout device 97 to execute the retry operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) as a limit, the payout number count switch 301 has detected no game balls. When it is detected (see step S661 and after in FIG. 83), the control state related to the payout is shifted to the error state, and the correction payout control is performed again on the condition that the error release signal is output from the error release switch 375 in the error state. A correction payout control restart process for executing

  Further, even during re-payout processing in an error state (specifically, during re-payout processing before setting a payout case error and during re-payout processing after the error release switch 375 is pressed), steps S601 to S601 shown in FIG. The process of S604 is being executed. That is, even when an error relating to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 301, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  Also, in the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, even when it is confirmed that the game ball has been paid out as a result of executing the re-payout process, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 375 is operated (specifically, when an error return time after operation has elapsed) (steps S802 and S807). That is, the payout case error (payout shortage error) state is not automatically canceled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the payout number count switch 301, etc., and the payout case does not go through human operation. The error is not cleared. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred.

  When the error cancel switch 375 is operated so as to be reset in hardware (reset to the payout control CPU 371), the error cancel switch 375 is operated, for example, a prize ball has not been paid out. The value of the number counter is also cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the payout control means is configured to perform the re-payout operation again by operating the error release switch 375, the payout process is executed reliably, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can not be given.

  In step S808, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the full tank switch 48. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error bit in the error flag is set (step S809). If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is in the OFF state, the full tank error bit is reset (step S810).

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 (step S811). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output (if it is on), the ball break error bit in the error flag is set (step S812). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is OFF, the ball break error bit is reset (step S813). When the ball break error bit is set, the bit corresponding to the ball break LED 52 in the output port 1 buffer is set to a value corresponding to the lighting state in the display control process of step S759.

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the state of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 (step S815). If the connection confirmation signal is not output (if it is in the off state), the main board unconnected error bit is set. Set (step S816). If the connection confirmation signal is output (if it is on), the main board non-connection error bit is reset (step S817).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 among the switch timers in which the state of the detection signal of each switch is set, and the value is the switch on maximum time (for example, “ 240 ") (step S818), the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 is set in the error flag (step S819). If the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 is less than the switch-on maximum time, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 is reset (step S820). Note that the value of each switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is switched on in the input determination process of step S751, and cleared by 0 when it is off. Accordingly, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 exceeds the switch on maximum time means that the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state exceeding the switch on maximum time. Then, it is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 301.

  Further, the payout control CPU 371, when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 becomes a switch-on determination value (eg, “2”) (step S821), the ball lending operation flag and the winning ball operation If both the middle flags are in the reset state, the game ball has passed through the payout number count switch 301 even though the payout operation is not in progress, and the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 in the error flag is set (steps S822 and S823). . If the ball lending operation flag or the winning ball operation flag is set, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is reset (step S824).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the input state of the VL signal from the card unit 50 (step S825). If the VL signal is not input (if it is in the OFF state), the prepaid card unit not yet out of the error flags is displayed. A connection error bit is set (step S826). If the VL signal is input (if it is on), the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit is reset (step S827).

  In the display control process in step S759, notification by display (numerical value display) corresponding to the error bit in the error flag is performed by the error display LED 374. Therefore, a communication error can be notified by the error display LED 374. Further, since the communication error is detected on the payout control means side, the communication error can be detected without increasing the burden on the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the main board non-connection error is automatically eliminated when the connection confirmation signal is turned on (see steps S815 and S817), but the condition that the error release switch 375 is further operated is added. Thus, the error state may be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, a communication error is reported so as to be distinguishable from a communication error with the card unit 50 (prepaid card unit non-connection error and prepaid card unit communication error) and other errors (see FIG. 85). ). Therefore, a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is easily identified.

  In this embodiment, the error display LED 374 mounted on the payout control board 37 installed on the back side of the gaming machine is informed that an error relating to the payout has occurred. You may mount an alerting | reporting means in other locations (For example, the payout unit in which the ball payout apparatus 97 etc. were concentratedly arranged). Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the image display installed in the front side of the gaming machine. Furthermore, you may make it alert | report by the indicator (for example, prize ball LED51) installed on the front side of a game machine, or a lamp | ramp. When an error related to payout occurs, for example, the prize ball LED 51 is blinked to notify that an error related to payout has occurred. If an error is notified by a display device installed on the front side of the gaming machine, the game shop clerk can more easily recognize the occurrence of the error. Moreover, you may use together the alerting | reporting by error display LED374, and the alerting | reporting by the indicator installed in the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, when a prepaid card unit unconnected error is detected in step S825, the payout control CPU 371 displays an error on the error display LED 374 in the timer interrupt process display control process (see step S759). As described above, the effect control unit may notify that the prepaid card unit is not connected. In this case, for example, when the payout control microcomputer 370 detects that the VL signal is not input in step S825, the effect control board 80 mounts a notification signal indicating that the VL signal is not input. You may transmit to a microcomputer. Also, for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a notification signal indicating that the VL signal is not input to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560, based on the received notification signal, An effect control command for designating notification that a prepaid card unit non-connection error may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer. Further, for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 may transmit an effect control command for designating notification that there is a prepaid card unit unconnected error to the effect control microcomputer. Then, the effect control microcomputer uses sound, display, light emitter, or the like based on the received notification signal or effect control command (for example, a message indicating that the prepaid card unit is not connected is displayed on the variable display device 9). And a notification that the prepaid card unit is not connected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 is initially set (random number circuit setting process) from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt is set, and the random number circuit In the setting process, a value based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560 is set as the initial value of the random number. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved. In addition, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and a capture signal using a radio signal can be generated for a gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to a specific gaming state such as a big hit state from being illegally established.

  In this embodiment, when the VL signal is not transmitted, the card unit 50 is not connected to the gaming machine by an error display using the error display LED 374. Thus, the occurrence of a communication error between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine can be recognized from the outside by a game store clerk or the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that communication between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine is continued in a state where a communication error occurs, and prevent erroneous information from being continuously communicated between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine. can do.

  In this embodiment, since the photocoupler 161 for transmitting the VL signal from the card unit 50 and the capacitors 163 and 164 connected to the photocoupler 161 are mounted on the dispensing control board 37, the card unit 50 It is not necessary to mount capacitors 163 and 164 connected to the photocoupler 161 that transmits the VL signal on the interface board 66 that relays signals between the control board 37 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, by confirming whether or not a capacitor is mounted on the interface board 66, it is possible to easily find that an unauthorized circuit is installed on the interface board 66, and to prevent unauthorized actions. it can.

  In this embodiment, the VL signal transmitted from the photocoupler 161 is branched on the payout board 37 and input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and the launch board 90. Therefore, even when a malfunction occurs in the payout control microcomputer 370, it is possible to stop the launch of the game ball according to the transmission state of the VL signal by the photocoupler 161.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the VL signal is not transmitted, it is configured to prohibit the payout of gaming balls for lending, so normal communication cannot be performed between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine. Sometimes it is possible to prevent lending a ball. Further, since it is configured to prohibit the payout of the game balls for lending, the prize is provided even though the communication state between the payout control microcomputer 370 and the game control microcomputer 560 is normal. It is possible to prevent a situation where the game ball is stopped until the game ball is paid out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the payout control by the payout control microcomputer 370 from being stopped more than necessary.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request, the interrupt process when a communication error is caused as an interrupt cause is preferentially executed to control the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 of the payout control board 37 mounted on the gaming machine in a state where a communication error has occurred. Therefore, malfunction due to a communication error can be prevented.

  For example, when an overrun occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, the next received data is stored in the receiving shift register 713 before the received data in the received data register 711 is read. It is overwritten and the CPU 56 cannot read the received data correctly. For this reason, communication with the microcomputer mounted on each control board cannot be performed correctly, causing the game control microcomputer 560 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when an overrun occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming control microcomputer 560 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of overrun.

  Further, for example, when a noise error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received due to the noise, which causes the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when a noise error occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the CPU 56 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of a noise error.

  Further, for example, when a framing error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, it is in a state where the stop bit of the received data has not been correctly received. . In this embodiment, when a framing error occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the CPU 56 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of a framing error.

  Further, for example, when a parity error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, it is in a state where each data bit or parity bit of the received data has not been correctly received, so there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, and the CPU 56 malfunctions. Cause. In this embodiment, when a parity error occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the CPU 56 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of a parity error.

  In this embodiment, when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, a prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, and the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the command. Control is performed to prohibit the reception of a prize ball ACK command. For example, if a prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 when a communication error occurs, an incorrect prize ball number command may be transmitted. Therefore, an incorrect number of game balls may be paid out based on the number of prize balls indicated in the wrong prize ball number command, which may affect the game result. In this embodiment, when a communication error occurs, control is performed so as to prohibit transmission of a prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, so that it is based on an erroneous prize ball command. It is possible to prevent an incorrect number of game balls from being paid out and affecting the game result.

  Note that when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, only reception of data from a microcomputer mounted on each control board may be prevented. For example, consider a case where serial communication is performed between the game control means and the effect control means. In this case, the communication performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer is only the transmission of the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer. No command is transmitted from the microcomputer to the game control microcomputer 560. That is, communication in only one direction is performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer. Further, even if an erroneous effect control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control board 80, only an incorrect effect display is performed on the variable display device 9, and an incorrect payout process is executed. Compared with the case where it ends, the influence which it has on a game result is small. Therefore, when serial communication is performed between the game control means and the effect control means, if a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to prohibit only data reception. Also good.

  In this embodiment, the inverting circuit 532 of the random number circuit 503 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 whose polarity is inverted, and outputs a latch signal for instructing storage of the random number in synchronization with the inverted clock signal SI2. . Therefore, the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number can be stored stably and reliably.

  In this embodiment, the expression “the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56” is used. Specifically, when an interrupt factor such as transmission / reception of data or occurrence of a communication error occurs. In addition, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 sets a set value to a corresponding bit (bit corresponding to an interrupt factor) of the status register A 705 and outputs an interrupt signal (internal IRQ) to the CPU 56. An interrupt request is made by the serial communication circuit 505. For example, when a communication error occurs, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 sets a set value in a corresponding bit (bits 0 to 3 corresponding to the communication error) of the status register A 705 and also sends an interrupt signal to the CPU 56. Is output, the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request when a communication error occurs.

  In this embodiment, a case where the VL signal transmitted from the photocoupler 161 is branched before being input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and the launch board 90, respectively. However, after the VL signal transmitted from the photocoupler 161 is input to the payout control microcomputer 370, the VL signal may be input from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the launch board 90. FIG. 88 is a block diagram showing another circuit configuration example for transmitting signals transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the VL signal from the card unit 50 is input to the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66. The VL signal input to the payout control board 37 is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the photocoupler 161 mounted on the payout control board 37. The VL signal input to the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to the launch board 90 via the AND circuit 165.

  In this embodiment, the recording medium used in the recording medium processing apparatus (card unit 50) is a magnetic card (prepaid card). However, the recording medium is not limited to a magnetic card, and is a non-contact type or contact type IC card. It may be. In addition, when the recording medium processing device is configured to be able to identify the recording information based on the identification code, the recording medium can be read at least by the recording medium processing device such as an identification code that can identify the recording information It may be something that can be recorded on. Further, the recording medium may be a medium on which a predetermined information recording symbol such as a barcode is printed so as to be readable. The shape of the recording medium is not limited to a card shape, and may be any shape such as a disk shape, a spherical shape, or a chip shape.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In each of the embodiments described above, the clock signal input to the latch signal generation circuit 533 is inverted, and the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 are shifted. The clock signal input to the latch signal generation circuit 533 may be delayed. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which a clock signal input to the latch signal generation circuit 533 is delayed will be described.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those in the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 89 is a block diagram illustrating another configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 89, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the random number circuit 503 includes a delay circuit 532A instead of the inverting circuit 532 shown in FIG.

  The delay circuit 532A delays the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524, thereby generating a delayed clock signal SI4 obtained by delaying the clock signal. Further, the delay circuit 532A outputs the generated delayed clock signal SI4 to the latch signal generation circuit 533. Therefore, in this embodiment, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs a latch signal to the random value storage circuit 531 in synchronization with the delayed clock signal SI4 obtained by delaying the random number generation clock signal SI1.

  The basic functions of the constituent elements of the random number circuit 503 other than the delay circuit 532A are the same as those functions described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the delay circuit 532A of the random number circuit 503 generates the delayed clock signal SI4 and outputs a latch signal for instructing storage of the random number in synchronization with the delayed clock signal SI4. . Therefore, the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number can be stored stably and reliably.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In each embodiment described above, a launch signal is output from the power supply board 910 to the launch board 90, and the launch of the game ball is driven or stopped by the launch board 90 according to the detection status of the VL signal, the full tank signal, and the touch sensor. Although the case has been described, the game control microcomputer 560 may control the refusal of the release of the game ball. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which the game control microcomputer 560 controls the rejection of the launch of the game ball will be described.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those in the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 90 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board 31 in the third embodiment. The hitting ball launching device for hitting and launching the game ball includes a launch motor 94 controlled by a circuit on the launch board 90, and the launch motor 94 rotates to launch the game ball toward the game area 7. The game ball may be launched toward the game area 7 by driving the solenoid without using the launch motor 94. A voltage (fire signal) for driving the fire motor 94 is supplied from the power supply board 910 to the fire board 90. In addition, a firing motor signal for driving the firing motor 94 is generated by the firing substrate 90 and transmitted to the firing motor 94. The touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation knob (hit ball handle) 5.

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 inputs the full signal detected by the full switch 48 and the touch sensor detection signal to the game control microcomputer 560. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to permit the launch of the game ball based on the input full signal and the detection signal of the touch sensor. If it is determined that the game ball is permitted to be launched, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch board 90 to permit the launch of the game ball. The circuit on the launch board 90 stops driving the launch motor 94 when the launch permission signal from the game control microcomputer 560 indicates an off state.

  Note that the full control signal or touch sensor detection signal is not output from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. For example, the full control switch 48 or touch sensor detection signal is output on the payout control board 37. The process may be branched and input to the game control microcomputer 560 as it is. In addition to a signal line for inputting a detection signal from the full switch 48 or the touch sensor to the payout control board 37 side, a signal line for inputting to the game control microcomputer 560 side is provided, and the full tank switch 48 or the touch sensor is used. These detection signals may be directly input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs only a full tank signal to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to permit the release of the game ball based only on the full tank signal. May be determined. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 may directly output the detection signal of the touch sensor to the launch board 90 and input the detection signal of the touch sensor to the AND circuit 91a of the launch board 90. Further, only a signal line for directly inputting the detection signal from the touch sensor to the discharge substrate 90 without inputting the detection signal to the payout control substrate 37 is provided, and the detection signal from the touch sensor is directly input to the AND circuit 91a of the discharge substrate 90. You may do it.

  FIG. 91 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97 in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the game ball is permitted to be released based on the full-tank signal and the detection signal of the touch sensor, it outputs a high-level launch permission signal to the launch board 90. To do. The launch permission signal from the game control microcomputer 560 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 91a mounted on the launch board 90, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 92 is input to the input side of the AND circuit 91a. Input to the other. Then, the output signal (fire motor signal) of the AND circuit 91a is input to the fire motor 94. That is, while the game control microcomputer 560 is not outputting the firing permission signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 is stopped.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the timer interrupt process, when the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines the state of the detection signal of each switch via the switch circuit 58 (switch process), the full signal and the touch sensor Based on this detection signal, it is determined whether or not the game ball is permitted to be fired (launch rejection determination process: step S21a). In this embodiment, steps S20 and S21 and steps S22 to S33 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the firing rejection determination process (step S21a) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the launch rejection determination process executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. In the firing rejection determination process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the detection signal of the touch sensor input from the payout control microcomputer 370 is in the on state (step S211). When the detection signal of the touch sensor is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the full signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 is on (step S212). When the full tank signal is not in the on state (in the off state), the CPU 56 determines that the game ball is permitted to be launched (step S213). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch board 90 (step S213). In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a high-level launch permission signal to the launch board 90 (step S214).

  When the detection signal of the touch sensor is not in the on state (in the off state) in step S211, the CPU 56 determines that the game ball is not permitted to be launched (step S215). That is, if the detection signal of the touch sensor is in the OFF state, it is determined that the player does not release the game ball because the player is not touching the operation knob 5. Further, when the full signal is on in step S212, the CPU 56 determines that the game ball is not permitted to be launched (step S215). That is, when the full tank signal is in the ON state, it is determined that a number of game balls are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, and therefore it is determined that the game ball is rejected to be fired.

  If it is determined that the game ball is not permitted to be launched, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of notifying that the game ball is in a firing stop state in which the game ball is not fired (step S216). In this case, for example, when a launch state notification lamp for notifying the launch state is provided around the game area 7, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the drive signal for the launch state notification lamp and stops firing. A display for notifying that it is in a state (for example, turning off a firing state notification lamp for notifying whether or not it is possible to launch). In addition, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of transmitting an effect control command (firing stop notification designation command) for designating the firing stop state to the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 80. When receiving the launch stop notification designation command, the effect control microcomputer executes a process for notifying the player that the launch is stopped using sound, display, light emitter, and the like.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the launch is permitted based on the full tank signal and the detection signal of the touch sensor, the launch permission signal is output to the launch board 90. Then, the launch board 90 controls to stop the launch of the game ball when the launch permission signal is not input. Therefore, when the player is not touching the operation knob 5 or when the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the launch of the game ball can be stopped. In addition, since the firing stop state is notified, it is possible for a player, a game clerk, or the like to easily recognize that the game ball is in a stopped state.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the CPU 56 executes the interrupt process at the time of a communication error with priority over other interrupt processes has been described. However, interrupt processes other than the interrupt process at the time of a communication error ( For example, priority may be given to interrupt processing at the time of reception. Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment in which interrupt processing at the time of reception is preferentially executed will be described.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those in the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the main process according to the same process as in FIG. 44 and FIG. In the main process, the process from step S1 to step S15a (including the process from step S80 and the process from step S91 to step S93) is the same as those shown in the first embodiment. Further, the processes from step S16 to step S19 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the serial communication circuit setting process in step S15a is executed and the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). . In this embodiment, an interrupt process that causes an interruption cause that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data is specified in advance in the specification information. Then, based on the designation information, the CPU 56 performs an initial setting so as to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is the reception of received data. That is, in this embodiment, in the interrupt processing priority table shown in FIG. 46, by default, the interrupt processing that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 is preferentially executed. Although set, the CPU 56 sets the priority order of the interrupt processing so that the interrupt processing whose cause is the reception of the received data is preferentially executed based on the designation information set by the user. change. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets a reception-time interrupt priority execution flag indicating that priority is given to interrupt processing that causes reception of received data.

  In the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 during the interrupt enabled state, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 follows the process shown in FIG. The serial communication circuit 505 executes interrupt processing according to the interrupt cause for which an interrupt request has been made.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 preferentially executes an interrupt process in which the reception data is received based on the fact that the reception interrupt priority execution flag is set.

  When there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 checks each bit of the status register A 705 of the serial communication circuit 505 to identify the cause of the interrupt. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 preferentially confirms bit 5 of the status register A705 to identify the cause of the interrupt. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the serial communication circuit 505 has made an interrupt request due to the fact that the received data has been received as an interrupt cause in preference to other interrupt causes (the occurrence of a communication error or the completion of transmission of transmission data). . When determining that the bit 5 of the status register A is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the reception data.

  If it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data, the CPU 56 preferentially executes the reception interrupt process shown in FIG. In this case, the CPU 56 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 505 is receiving reception data (step S42).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 initializes the priority of interrupt processing before setting the interrupt-permitted state in the main processing. For this reason, it is possible to reliably execute an interrupt process to be preferentially executed among interrupt processes corresponding to a plurality of types of interrupt causes. In addition, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initialized, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 can be improved.

  For example, in the reception process in the prize ball process (for example, the prize ball ACK waiting process in step S1234), each bit of the status register A705 is checked to determine whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. If a simple program is built, control can be performed so that a command is not received when a communication error occurs without executing an interrupt process that causes the occurrence of a communication error. Therefore, when a program that confirms the occurrence of a communication error in the reception process is built, priority is given to the interrupt process that causes the reception of data to cause a game control micro The degree of freedom of the program executed by the CPU 56 of the computer 560 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expression “the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 during reception” is used. Specifically, when an interrupt factor (data reception in this example) occurs. In addition, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 sets a setting value in a corresponding bit of the status register A 705 (bit 5 corresponding to data reception) and outputs an interrupt signal to the CPU 56, whereby the serial communication circuit 505 An interrupt request is received at the time of reception.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case has been described in which the CPU 56 sets or changes which interrupt process has priority over the interrupt process corresponding to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. However, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are generated at the same time, it may be possible to set or change which interrupt processing is to be preferentially executed. A fifth embodiment for setting or changing which of the timer interrupt and the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is to be prioritized will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those in the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, main processing in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing main processing in the fifth embodiment. Of the main processing, the processing from step S1 to step S6 (including step S80) is the same as the processing shown in the first embodiment (see FIG. 44). In the main process shown in FIG. 94, the processes from step S7 to step S15a (including the processes from step S91 to step S93) are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the serial communication circuit setting process in step S15a is executed and the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process executed when a timer interrupt occurs and the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 505. The priority of interrupt processing is initially set (step S15c).

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an interrupt processing priority table in the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 is initially configured to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 in accordance with the interrupt process priority table shown in FIG. Set. That is, the CPU 56 sets by default so that an interrupt process (in this example, a communication error interrupt process) by an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  For example, a case where a timer interrupt process is designated in designated information stored in advance will be described. In this case, based on the designation information, the CPU 56 performs timer interrupt processing for each interrupt processing for the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (communication error interrupt processing, reception interrupt processing, and transmission completion interrupt processing). ) To be executed in preference to (). That is, in the interrupt processing priority table shown in FIG. 95, the interrupt processing is set by default so as to preferentially execute the interrupt processing that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505. Based on the designation information set by the user, the CPU 56 changes the priority of the interrupt process so that the timer interrupt process is executed with priority. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets a timer interrupt priority execution flag indicating that timer interrupt processing is executed with priority.

  Further, the processes from step S16 to step S19 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. When the timer interrupt setting process is executed in step S16 and the interrupt enabled state is set, the timer interrupt or the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is executed until the process of step S17 is executed and the interrupt disabled state is set. It will be in a state to allow. When the processing of step S19 is executed in the loop processing of steps S17 to S19 and set to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt or serial is executed until the processing of step S17 is executed and the interrupt is disabled. An interrupt request from the communication circuit 505 is permitted. When a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. In addition, when an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process and reception) to be described later. Execute time interruption processing and transmission completion interruption processing). In the present embodiment, by executing step S15c before the timer interrupt setting process in step S16, the timer interrupt process and the serial number are set before the timer interrupt or the interrupt request is permitted. Processing for setting or changing the priority of interrupt processing in response to an interrupt request from the communication circuit 505 is performed.

  In the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 during the interrupt enabled state, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 follows the process shown in FIG. The serial communication circuit 505 executes interrupt processing according to the interrupt cause for which an interrupt request has been made. Further, when a timer interrupt occurs in the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process according to the process shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 occur at the same time, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an interrupt process is preferentially executed. . For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 preferentially executes timer interrupt processing based on the setting of the timer interrupt priority execution flag.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets each interrupt corresponding to the interrupt request from the timer interrupt process and the serial communication circuit 505 before setting the interrupt enabled state in the main process. Initialize processing priority. Therefore, among the interrupt processing corresponding to the timer interrupt processing and the plurality of types of interrupt causes, the interrupt processing to be executed with priority can be surely executed. Further, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initially set, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 can be improved.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, can be suitably applied to a gaming machine including a gaming control microcomputer incorporating a random number circuit and a serial communication circuit.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front surface of the game board in the state which removed the glass door frame. It is the rear view which looked at the gaming machine from the back. It is the front view and sectional drawing which show a ball dispensing apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the example of a circuit structure for transmitting the signal transmitted / received by a card unit and a payment control board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board and a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example in case a count value permutation change circuit changes the permutation of the count value which a counter outputs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a count value permutation change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random number maximum value setting register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a period setting register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a count value update register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random value taking-in register. It is explanatory drawing of an example of the random number update system selection register and the random number update system selection data written in the random number update system selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random number circuit starting register. It is a circuit diagram which shows one structural example of a random value memory circuit. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random value storage circuit, and the timing when a random value storage circuit outputs each signal. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the transmission part of a serial communication circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the receiving part of a serial communication circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data format of the data which serial communication transmits / receives with the microcomputer mounted in each control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a baud rate register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register A and communication format setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register B and interrupt request setting data. It is a figure which shows the example of status register A and status confirmation data. It is a figure which shows the example of status register B and status confirmation data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register C and error interrupt request setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data register with which a serial communication circuit is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map of the storage area in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in a user program management area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of initial value change system setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a user program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a random number circuit setting program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which updates the value of random R, or reads the value of random R, when the 1st random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which updates the value of random R, or reads the value of random R, when the 2nd random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows each memory with which the microcomputer for game control is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table memory for jackpot determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in a game control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an interruption process priority table. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number maximum value reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value change process. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random number circuit, and the timing when each signal is generated in a random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a serial communication circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit initial value update process. It is a flowchart which shows a count value permutation change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control means from a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control means and a payout control means. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout control signal and a payout control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process performed by the serial communication circuit in response to an interrupt request. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission completion waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball ACK waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball re-transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball abnormality detection process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in a payout control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the input port in a payout control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the kind of error, and the display of LED for an error display. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a block diagram which shows the other circuit structural example for transmitting the signal transmitted / received by a card unit and the payment control board. It is a block diagram which shows the other structural example of a random number circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control board (main board | substrate) in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of the payout control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge permission determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the interruption process priority table in 5th Embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

1 Pachinko machine 31 Game control board (main board)
37 Dispensing control board 50 Card unit 56 CPU
66 Interface board 90 Launch board 94 Launch motor 161 Photocoupler 163 Capacitor 164 Capacitor 370 Discharge control microcomputer 371 Discharge control CPU
503a 12-bit random number circuit 503b 16-bit random number circuit 505 Serial communication circuit 521 Counter 522 Comparator 523 Counter value permutation change circuit 528 Selector 531 Random value storage circuit 532 Inversion circuit 532A Delay circuit 533 Latch signal generation circuit 560 Game control microcomputer 714 Interrupt control circuit 910 Power supply board

Claims (12)

A player can play a predetermined game by launching a game medium into the game area, and is provided with variable display means that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. After the variable display execution condition is satisfied, the variable information display is started based on the variable display start condition being satisfied. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, the player A gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous specific gaming state and pays out a rented game medium to be lent to a player based on a rent request signal from a rent request receiving device that has received a rent request from a player,
Launching means for launching the gaming medium toward the gaming area;
Game control microcomputer including a game control CPU for executing game control processing, a random number circuit for generating random numbers, a microcomputer including a CPU other than the game control CPU and a serial communication circuit for performing serial communication When,
A payout means for paying out the rental game medium;
A payout control microcomputer for executing a payout control process for controlling the payout means when a loan request accepting device connection determination signal for determining whether or not the loan request accepting device is connected to a gaming machine is input; A payout control board on which a photocoupler that transmits the lending request accepting apparatus connection determination signal from the lending request accepting apparatus, and a capacitor that is connected between the lending request accepting apparatus and the photocoupler, and
A relay board that relays a lending request signal from the lending request reception device and outputs the signal to the payout control board;
A launch stop means for stopping the drive of the launch means when the lending request acceptance device connection determination signal is not transmitted from the photocoupler,
The random number circuit includes:
Numerical value updating means for updating numerical data according to a predetermined order from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value in a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated based on an input of a predetermined signal;
Random number storage means for storing numerical data updated by the numerical value update means as a random value,
The serial communication circuit has an interrupt request means for generating an interrupt request according to the established interrupt request condition for the game control CPU when any of a plurality of interrupt request conditions is satisfied. Including
The game control microcomputer is:
As the random number circuit, a plurality of random number circuits having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means are incorporated,
Timer interrupt setting means for performing setting for generating a timer interrupt every predetermined time when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
Random number circuit initial setting means for performing initial setting of the random number circuit before the timer interrupt setting is set by the timer interrupt setting means when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
The game control CPU is:
Interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing based on an interrupt request from the interrupt request means;
Execution condition determining means for determining whether or not a variable display execution condition is satisfied when the timer interrupt occurs;
Random number reading means for reading a random value stored in the random number storage means when the execution condition determination means determines that the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied;
By determining whether or not the random number value read by the random number reading means matches a predetermined determination value, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result. Display result determining means,
The dispensing control microcomputer is:
A transmission state determination means for determining a transmission state of the lending request reception device connection determination signal from the photocoupler;
A connection error notification process for notifying that the lending request acceptance device is not connected to the gaming machine when the transmission state judging means determines that the lending request acceptance device connection judgment signal is not transmitted. Connection error notification processing means to be executed,
In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means sets a usable random number circuit from among a plurality of random number circuits built in the game control microcomputer, and the numerical value updating means updates the predetermined value data. Is set based on microcomputer identification information for identifying the game control microcomputer assigned to each of the game control microcomputers,
The game control microcomputer further includes random number stopping means for stopping the function of a random number circuit other than the random number circuit set to be usable by the random number circuit initial setting means,
The interrupt request generated by the interrupt request means includes an error time interrupt request generated when an interrupt request condition is satisfied when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit,
The interrupt processing execution means executes an interrupt process based on the error time interrupt request when an interrupt request means simultaneously generates a plurality of interrupt requests. Including priority processing means for executing priority over interrupt processing based on a request;
A gaming machine comprising: a communication prohibiting means for prohibiting serial communication in an interrupt process based on the error interrupt request. Provided with an interrupt permission means for permitting execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means,
The interrupt request generated by the interrupt request means is a reception interrupt request generated when the interrupt request condition is satisfied when the serial communication circuit receives a signal from a microcomputer incorporating a CPU other than the game control CPU. Including
The game control microcomputer includes priority order changing means for changing the priority order of the interrupt processing executed by the priority processing means before the interrupt permission means is permitted to execute the interrupt processing.
The priority processing means is changed by the priority changing means so that the priority of the interrupt processing is executed in preference to the interrupt processing based on the reception interrupt request over the interrupt processing based on the error time interrupt request. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the interrupt process based on the reception interrupt request is executed in preference to the interrupt process based on the error interrupt request. The game control microcomputer executes the timer interrupt process executed by the timer interrupt process executing means and the interrupt process executing means when the timer interrupt and the interrupt request by the interrupt request means occur simultaneously. Including an interrupt priority setting means for setting the priority with the interrupt processing before the timer interrupt is set by the timer interrupt setting means,
The interrupt process executing means executes the interrupt process executed by the interrupt process executing means with priority over the timer interrupt process executed by the timer interrupt process executing means by the interrupt priority setting means. If a timer interrupt and an interrupt request by the interrupt request means are generated at the same time, the timer interrupt process executing means interrupts the timer interrupt process before executing the timer interrupt process. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein interrupt processing based on an interrupt request by the interrupt request means is executed.   The loan request accepting apparatus connection determination signal transmitted from the photocoupler is branched on the payout control board and input to the payout control microcomputer and the launch board for transmitting the fire signal for driving the launching means. The gaming machine according to claim 3. A winning detection means for detecting that a game medium has won a predetermined winning area and outputting a winning detection signal;
A microcomputer incorporating a CPU other than the game control CPU includes a payout control microcomputer,
The game control microcomputer includes payout number data transmission means for transmitting, to the payout control microcomputer, payout number data indicating the number of prize game media to be paid out in response to the input of the winning detection signal. ,
The dispensing control microcomputer
Payout control for driving out the payout means to pay out the unpaid premium game media that have not been paid out among the payout numbers of the premium game media that can be specified by the payout number data transmitted by the payout number data transmission means. A prize game medium payout control means to be executed;
Lending game medium payout control means for executing payout control for driving the payout means to pay out the loaned game media based on the loan request signal from the loan request accepting device;
Lending game medium payout prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of lending game medium payout control by the lending game medium payout control means when it is determined by the transmission state determining means that the lending request accepting device connection determination signal is not transmitted. Including
The prize game medium payout control means executes the prize game medium payout control even when execution of the loaned game medium payout control is prohibited by the rental game medium payout prohibiting means. A gaming machine described in any one of them. Random circuit initial setting means
In the initial setting, the maximum value for setting a predetermined maximum value within the range of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means is set in the numerical maximum value register in which the value as the maximum value of the predetermined range in which numerical data is updated Value setting means;
Numeric update means
Set value determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined maximum value set by the maximum value setting means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit;
When the predetermined maximum value set in the numerical value maximum value register is determined to be less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value by the set value determining means, the numerical value maximum value register can be updated by the numerical value updating means. the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 comprising a maximum value resetting means for resetting the predetermined value in the range of numerical data. A clock signal generating means for generating a clock signal of a predetermined period and outputting it to a random number circuit;
The numerical value updating means updates the numerical data on the condition that the clock signal has been input a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , wherein the random number circuit initial setting means sets the number of times of input of a clock signal, which is a condition for the numerical value updating means to update the numerical data in the initial setting. The game control microcomputer includes numerical operation means for calculating a predetermined initial value of numerical data set by the random number circuit initial setting means using microcomputer identification information,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 , wherein the random number circuit initial setting means sets an initial value based on a value calculated by calculation by the numerical value calculation means. Provided with a start signal output means for outputting a start signal based on the winning of a game medium in a predetermined area;
The random number circuit includes latch signal output means for outputting a latch signal for causing the random number storage means to store numerical data updated by the numerical value update means based on the input of the start signal from the start signal output means. ,
The game according to any one of claims 1 to 8 , wherein the latch signal output means outputs the latch signal on condition that the start signal is continuously input from the start signal output means for a predetermined period. Machine. The execution condition determining means determines that the variable display execution condition is satisfied on the condition that the start signal from the start signal output means is input over a predetermined number of times of the timer interrupt processing.
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the predetermined period is shorter than a period in which the predetermined number of times of the timer interrupt processing are executed. The random number circuit initial setting means sets whether or not to change the predetermined initial value set by the random number circuit initial setting means when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means in the initial setting. Including initial value change setting means to
The random number circuit, when the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means, a notification signal output means for outputting a notification signal indicating that the numerical data has been updated to the predetermined final value;
An initial value changing means for changing the value of the predetermined initial value on the condition that the initial value is changed by the initial value change setting means based on the output of the notification signal; A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10 . The random number circuit initial setting means includes numerical value order setting means for setting whether or not to change the arrangement order of values from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means in the initial setting. Including
The random number circuit
A notification signal output means for outputting a notification signal indicating that the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value when the numerical data is updated to the predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means;
On the condition that, based on the output of the notification signal, the numerical order setting means is configured to change the arrangement order of the numerical data from the predetermined initial value to the predetermined final value. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11 , further comprising: numerical value order changing means for changing an arrangement order of the numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means from the predetermined initial value to the predetermined final value. .

Images